User Manual

CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

Catalog Numbers 1769-L16ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ER-BB1B, 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L24ER-QB1B, 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B, 1769-
L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ER, 1769-L30ER-NSE, 1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ER, 1769-L33ERM, 1769-L36ERM
Important User Information
Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment. Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls (publication SGI-1.1 available from
your local Rockwell Automation® sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/) describes some
important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference,
and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment
must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the
use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment,
which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Allen-Bradley, CompactLogix, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.

Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
 Summary of Changes

This manual contains new and updated information. Changes throughout this
revision are marked by change bars, as shown to the right of this paragraph.

Topic Page
Updated embedded input point wiring diagrams on a CompactLogix™ 5370 L1 147
controller
Updated embedded output point wiring diagrams on a CompactLogix 5370 L1 150…151
controller
Use the Event Task 161
Addition of Develop Applications chapter 267
Addition of History of Changes appendix 315

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 3

Summary of Changes

Notes:

4 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Table of Contents

Preface Studio 5000 Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Chapter 1
Install the CompactLogix 5370 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
L1 Controller CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Installation Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Install the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Mount the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Ground the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Install the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Connect Power to the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP
Network Topologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 2
Install the CompactLogix 5370 Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
L2 Controller CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Installation Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Install the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Install the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Mount the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Ground the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Install the Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Connect Power to the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP
Network Topologies. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 5

Table of Contents

Chapter 3
Install the CompactLogix 5370 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
L3 Controller CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Installation Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Install the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Install the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Assemble the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Mount the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Ground the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Connect Power to the Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP
Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Chapter 4
Complete Software Tasks Required Set a Controller’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Use the BOOTP Server to Set the Controller’s IP Address . . . . . . . 78
Use the DHCP Server to Set the Controller’s IP Address . . . . . . . . 82
Installation
Use RSLinx Classic Software to Set the Controller’s IP Address . . 83
Use Logix Designer Application to Set the C
ontroller’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Use the SD Card to Set the Controller’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Change a Controller’s IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Change the Network IP Address with RSLinx
Classic Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Change the Network IP Address with Logix
Designer Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Change the Network IP Address with an SD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Load the Controller Firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Use the ControlFLASH Utility to Load Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Use AutoFlash to Load Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Use the Secure Digital Card to Load Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Select the Controller’s Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

6 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Table of Contents

Chapter 5
CompactLogix 5370 CompactLogix 5370 Control System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Controllers Overview Controller Functionality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Support for Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network . . 110
Example System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
DeviceNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Chapter 6
Communicate over Networks EtherNet/IP Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Available Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
EtherNet/IP Network Functionality on
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
EtherNet/IP Network Topologies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Socket Interface with CompactLogix 5370 Controllers . . . . . . . . . 126
MSG Source Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Quality of Service (QoS) and I/O Module Connections . . . . . . . . 130
DeviceNet Network Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Available Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module. . . . . . . . . . 133
Power Supply Distance Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Current Capacity in CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems . . 138

Chapter 7
Use I/O Modules with Select I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Connect Power to I/O Devices Connected to a
CompactLogix 5730 L1 Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Embedded I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . 155
Validate I/O Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Set the Number of Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Empty Slots and Removal and Insertion Under
Power Situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Estimate Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Module Faults Related to RPI Estimates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Calculate System Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Physical Placement of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Use the Event Task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Configure I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Common Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 7

Table of Contents

Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Exact Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Compatible Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Disabled Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an
EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Monitor I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Bus Off Detection and Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Chapter 8
Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix Select I/O Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
5370 L2 Controllers Embedded I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Determine Embedded Module Update Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Channel Update Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Embedded Analog I/O Modules Data Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Input Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Output Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Configuration Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Local Expansion Modules - Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network. . . . . . . . 211
Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Validate I/O Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Estimate Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
System Power Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Power Supply Distance Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Configure Local I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configure Embedded I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configure Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Common Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Exact Match. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Compatible Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Disabled Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an
EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network . . . . . . 232
Monitor I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
End-cap Detection and Module Faults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

8 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Table of Contents

Chapter 9
Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix Select I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5370 L3 Controllers Local Expansion Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . 240
Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network. . . . . . . . . . . 241
Validate I/O Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Estimate Requested Packet Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Calculate System Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Physical Placement of I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Power Supply Distance Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configure I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Common Configuration Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Electronic Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Exact Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Compatible Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Disabled Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an
EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network. . . . . . 263
Monitor I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
End-cap Detection and Module Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Chapter 10
Develop Applications Elements of a Control Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Task Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Scheduled and Unscheduled Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Extended Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Access Extended Properties in Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Programming Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Add-On Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Monitoring Controller Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Monitoring I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Determine if I/O Communication has Timed Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Determine if I/O Communication to a Specific I/O
Module has Timed Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Interrupt the Execution of Logic and Execute the
Fault Handler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 9

Table of Contents

System Overhead Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Configure the System Overhead Time Slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Sample Controller Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Chapter 11
Develop Integrated Motion over an Motion Axes Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
EtherNet/IP Network Applications AXIS_VIRTUAL Axis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
AXIS_CIP_DRIVE Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Maximum Number of Position Loop-configured Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Position Loop-configured Drive Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Configure Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network . . . . . . . . 293
Enable Time Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Add a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Scalability in Applications Using Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ERM, and
1769-L36ERM Controllers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
1769-L18ERM-BB1B Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Chapter 12
Use a Secure Digital Card Store or Load a Project with the Secure Digital Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Store a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Load a Project. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Appendix A
Status Indicators Use the CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Status Indicators . . . . . . . . . 309

Appendix B
Connections over an . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
EtherNet/IP Network
Appendix C
History of Changes Changes to the Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

10 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Preface

This manual describes the necessary tasks to install, configure, program, and
operate a CompactLogix 5370 controller. This manual is intended for
automation engineers and control system developers.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers are designed to provide solution for small and
medium-sized applications.

Studio 5000 Environment The Studio 5000™ Engineering and Design Environment combines engineering
and design elements into a common environment. The first element in the
Studio 5000 environment is the Logix Designer application. The Logix Designer
application is the rebranding of RSLogix™ 5000 software and will continue to be
the product to program Logix5000™ controllers for discrete, process, batch,
motion, safety, and drive-based solutions.

The Studio 5000 environment is the foundation for the future of

Rockwell Automation engineering design tools and capabilities. It is the one
place for design engineers to develop all the elements of their control system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 11

Preface

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information that may assist you when using
Rockwell Automation products.
Resource Description
CompactLogix Selection Guide, publication Describes information about products used in a CompactLogix
1769-SG001 control system to assist you in designing a control solution.
CompactLogix Controllers Specifications Technical Provides CompactLogix controller specifications.
Data, publication 1769-TD005
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Quick Start, Describes basic tasks to design, install and start a CompactLogix
publication IASIMP-QS024 5370 L1 control system.
CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Quick Start, Describes basic tasks to design, install and start a CompactLogix
publication IASIMP-QS025 5370 L1 control system.
CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Quick Start, Describes basic tasks to design, install and start a CompactLogix
publication IASIMP-QS023 5370 L3 control system.
Integrated Architecture and CIP Sync Configuration Describes CIP Sync technology and how to synchronize clocks in
Application Technique, publication IA-AT003 the Rockwell Automation Integrated Architecture™ system.
CIP Motion Configuration and Startup User Manual, Describes basic tasks you can use to quickly and easily
publication MOTION-UM003 understand how best to create an Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network control solution.
Kinetix 350 Single-axis EtherNet/IP Servo Drive Describes how to install, use and troubleshoot Kinetix® 350
User Manual, publication 2097-UM002 drives.
PowerFlex 755 Drive Embedded EtherNet/IP Describes how to install, use and troubleshoot PowerFlex® 755
Adapter User Manual, publication 750COM-UM001 drives.
Kinetix 6200 and Kinetix 6500 Modular Multi-axis Describes how to install, use and troubleshoot Kinetix 6500
Servo Drives User Manual, publication 2094-UM002 drives.
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Describes how to create and edit a program, communicate with
Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM001 and configure modules.
Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, Describes the following concepts that you should consider when
publication ENET-RM002 designing a control system that includes an EtherNet/IP
network:
• EtherNet/IP overview
• Ethernet infrastructure
• EtherNet/IP protocol
Logix5000 Controllers Execution Time and Memory Details how to estimate the execution time and memory use of
Use Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM087 the controller’s logic.
Logix5000 Controllers General Instruction Set Details how to program the controller for sequential
Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003 applications.
Logix5000 Controllers Process Control/Drives Details how to program the controller for process or drives
Instruction Set Reference Manual, publication applications.
1756-RM006
Logix5000 Controllers Motion Instructions Details how to program the controllers for motion applications.
Reference Manual, publication MOTION-RM002
CIP Motion Configuration and Start-up User Describes how to configure an Integrated Motion over EtherNet/
Manual, publication MOTION-UM003 IP motion application and to start up that motion solution in a
Logix5000 control system.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation
Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other
certification details.

You can view or download publications at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/

literature/. To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local
Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.

12 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 1

Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Topic Page
Before You Begin 16
Install the Secure Digital Card 20
Install the System 22
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable 31
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network 32

ATTENTION: Environment and Enclosure

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined
in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated
disturbances.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those
specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from
accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame,
complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if nonmetallic. The interior of the enclosure must be
accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific
enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 13

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B,
I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs
When combining products within a system, the most adverse produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé
determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les
of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD -
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
been removed or the area is known to be
nonhazardous. de débrancher l'équipement.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
unless power has been removed or the area is
known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à
connections that mate to this equipment by using l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs
screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or
other means provided with this product. filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit.
• La substitution de composants peut rendre cet
• Substitution of components may impair suitability équipement inadapté à une utilisation en
for Class I, Division 2.
environnement de Classe I, Division 2.
• If this product contains batteries, they must only
• S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non
be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. dangereux avant de changer les piles.

14 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when
applied in Zone 2 environments.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not open when energized." After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these
guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 15

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Before You Begin Consider the following before installing a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller:

ATTENTION: If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the

manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.

• The control system includes the controller, an embedded power supply,

and embedded I/O points.

• The embedded power supply is a 24V DC nominal, non-isolated

power supply with an input range of 10…28.8V DC. You wire the
embedded power supply via a removable connector.

• You must use a dedicated external Class 2/SELV-approved power supply to

provide power to the system, according to the application’s needs and
within the controller’s operating voltage range.

The external power supply that provides power to the controller’s

embedded power supply cannot be used to provide power to any other
components or devices in the application.

• The controller has sixteen embedded digital input points and sixteen
embedded digital output points. You wire the input and output points via
a removable connector.

• The controller supports the use of 1734 POINT I/O™ modules on the
POINTBus™ backplane as local expansion modules.

IMPORTANT We strongly recommend that you use the latest series and firmware
revision for all 1734 POINT I/O modules in the local expansion slots to
make sure your application will operate as expected.

The following table lists local expansion module support by controller

catalog number.
Table 1 - Local Expansion Module Support for CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers
Cat. No. 1734 POINT I/O Modules Supported, max
1769-L16ER-BB1B 6
1769-L18ER-BB1B 8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B

16 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

• You can use up to the maximum number of 1734 POINT I/O modules
with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers listed in Table 1, as long as
the total current drawn by the embedded I/O and local expansion modules
does not exceed the available POINTBus backplane current of 1 A and/or
field power current of 3 A.

Depending on your application’s configuration, you can use one of the

following devices to make additional POINTBus backplane current and/
or field power current available:

– 1734-EP24DC POINT I/O Expansion Power Supply - An

expansion power supply is installed between embedded I/O modules
and local expansion modules or between local expansion modules.

The expansion power supply breaks the available POINTBus

backplane current between the modules to its left and right. With the
expansion power supply installed, the modules to its left can draw up to
1 A of POINTBus backplane current and the modules to its right can
draw as much current as that provided by the expansion power supply.

Additionally, the expansion power supply breaks the available field

power current between the modules to its left and right With the
expansion power supply installed, the modules to its left can draw up to
3 A of field power current and the modules to its right can draw as
much field power current as allowed by the expansion power supply.

For more information on the 1734-EP24DC expansion power supply,

see the POINT I/O 24V DC Expansion Power Supply Installation
Instructions, publication 1734-IN058.
– 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power Distributor Module - A field
power distributor module can also be installed between embedded I/O
modules and local expansion modules or between local expansion
modules.

The field power distributor module breaks the available field power
current between the modules to its left and right. With the field power
distributor module installed, the modules to its left can draw up 3 A of
field power current, and the modules to its right can draw as much field
power current as allowed by the field power distributor.

For more information on the 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power

Distributor module, see the POINT I/O Field Power Distributor
Module Installation Instructions, publication 1734-IN059.

IMPORTANT Remember, the field power distributor module only changes the level
of field power current available in the system. It does not affect the
level of POINTBus backplane current available.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 17

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

ATTENTION: Do not discard the end cap. Use this end cap to cover the
exposed interconnections on the last mounting base on the DIN rail.
Failure to do so could result in equipment damage or injury from
electric shock.
For more information on how to terminate the end of your system, see
page 25.

• 1734 POINT I/O modules support removal and insertion under power.

WARNING: If you insert or remove the module while backplane power

is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in
hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller with local

expansion modules installed.

Removable Connector for

Embedded Power Supply

Embedded I/O Module Local Expansion Modules

18 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Parts

These parts are included in the box when you order your controller:
• Controller - Specific catalog number varies by order

• 1784-SD1 Secure Digital (SD) card with 1 GB of memory storage

A 1784-SD2 SD card with 2 GB of memory storage, or additional

1784-SD1 SD cards, are also available if you need additional memory.

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of flash media is strongly dependent on the

number of write cycles that are performed. Flash media use wear
leveling but users should avoid frequent writes.
Avoiding frequent writes is particularly important when logging data.
We recommend that you log data to a buffer in your controller’s
memory and limit the number of times data is written to removable
media.

• An end cap protective covering that slides onto the right side of the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Installation Summary To install a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller, follow these steps.

1. Install the Secure Digital Card.

2. Install the System.
3. Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable.
4. Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 19

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Install the Secure The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller is shipped from the factory with the
1784-SD1 SD card installed.
Digital Card
Complete these steps to re-install an SD card that has been removed from the
controller back into the controller or if installing a new SD card into the
controller.

WARNING: When you insert or remove the SD card while power is on, an
electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

1. Verify that the SD card is locked or unlocked according to your preference.

Consider these when deciding to lock the card before installation:
– If the card is unlocked, the controller can write data to it or read data
from it.
– If the card is locked, the controller can only read data from it and you
may experience issues when updating the firmware on your controller

Unlocked Locked

32005-M

2. Open the door for the SD card.

32225-M

20 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

3. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

You can install the SD card in one orientation only. The beveled corner
should be at the top.

If you feel resistance when inserting the SD card, pull it out and change the
orientation.

4. Gently press the card until it clicks into place.

32226-M

5. Close the SD card door.

32227-M

We recommend you keep the SD card door closed during normal system
operation. For more information on using the SD card, see Use a Secure
Digital Card on page 301.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 21

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Install the System Complete the following steps to install the CompactLogix 5370 L1
control system.
• Mount the System
• Ground the System
• Install the Controller
• Connect Power to the Controller

Mount the System

You mount a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system on a DIN rail. Before you
complete the steps required to installing the system, install a DIN rail.

WARNING: When used in a Class I, Division 2, hazardous location, this

equipment must be mounted in a suitable enclosure with proper wiring
method that complies with the governing electrical codes.

Before you mount a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system, consider

the following requirements:
• Available DIN Rails
• Minimum Spacing
• System Dimensions

Available DIN Rails

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc-plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

You can mount the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller on the following

DIN rails:
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

IMPORTANT You must install bumpers on the back of your CompactLogix 5370 L1
controller before mounting it on the EN 50022 - 35 x 15 mm
(1.38 x 0.59 in.) DIN rail.
For more information about the required bumper (PN-83094), contact
your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales
representative.

22 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

Minimum Spacing

Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, and adjacent equipment. Allow
50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides, as shown. This provides ventilation and
electrical isolation.

50 mm
Top (2 in.)

50 mm 50 mm

1734 POINT I/O Module

1734 POINT I/O Module

1734 POINT I/O Module

Supply and I/O Module
CompactLogix 5370 L1
(2 in.) (2 in.)

Embedded Power
Controller with

End Cap
Side Side

Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

System Dimensions

This graphic shows the system dimensions.

12.00 mm
(0.47 in.)
105 mm 100.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (3.94 in.)

130.00 mm
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
(5.11 in.)

144.00 mm
(5.67 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 23

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Ground the System

ATTENTION: This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded

mounting surface such as a metal panel. Additional grounding connections
from the power supply's mounting tabs or DIN rail (if used) are not required
unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell
Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional information.

Install the Controller

Complete these steps to install the controller.

1. Pull locking tabs out.

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

2. Slide the controller into position on the DIN rail and push the locking
tabs in.

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

24 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

3. If you are not using local expansion modules, use the tongue-and-groove
slots on the right side of the controller to slide a protective covering onto
the controller. The protective cover ships with the controller.

The covering covers the exposed interconnections on the right side of the
controller. Failure to use a protective covering could result in equipment
damage or injury from electric shock.

If you are using local expansion modules, see Local Expansion Modules on
page 152 for more information on installing them in a
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 25

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Connect Power to the Controller

IMPORTANT This section describes how to power the controller via the VDC+ and VDC-
terminals.
Connections to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals do not provide power to input or
output devices connected to the controller’s embedded I/O modules or local
expansion modules.
For more information on how to provide power to input or output devices that
are connected to the controller’s embedded I/O modules and local
expansion modules, see page 140.

You must connect a dedicated Class 2/SELV-listed external power supply to the
controller’s embedded power supply. The external power supply converts 115/
230V AC power to 24V DC or other application-required DC voltage that is
within the controller’s operating range.

WARNING: Do not connect directly to line voltage. Line voltage must be

supplied by a suitable, approved isolating transformer or power supply having
short circuit capacity not exceeding 100 VA maximum or equivalent.

Power is connected to the controller via a removable connector that is connected

to the front of the controller. The following graphic shows the connector.

IMPORTANT The CG terminal on the removable connector connects to the DIN rail via a
grounding clip on the back of the controller. The controller is grounded once it
is installed on a DIN rail as described in Mount the System on page 22.
You should not make any connections to the CG terminal.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect an external 24V DC power source

to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

For information on how to provide power to input and output devices

connected to the controller’s embedded I/O modules and local expansion
modules via the removable connector, see page 140.

• You must use an external power supply that is Class 2 or SELV-listed.

• The external power supply that provides power to the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller must be dedicated to powering
the controller.

• You must use a separate, dedicated external 24V DC power source to

connect power to other terminals on the removable connector and devices
in the system, for example, the FP+ terminal or a bar code scanner,
respectively.

• Use a power source that most effectively meets your application needs.
That is, calculate your application’s power requirements before choosing a
power source to avoid using a power source that far exceeds your
application requirements.

• The external 24V DC power source connected to the VDC+ and VDC-
terminals on the removable connector must reside in the same enclosure as
the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

• This section assumes that any DIN rail you use has been grounded
following Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
publication 1770-4.1

• The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller’s embedded power supply provides

power to the controller and POINTBus backplane. It does not provide
field-side power to the embedded I/O or local expansion modules.

• Not all Class 2/SELV-listed power supplies are certified for use in all
applications, for example, use in both nonhazardous and hazardous
environments.

Before installing an external power supply, consult all specification and

certification information to verify that you are using an acceptable external
power supply.

• For example purposes, this section describes how to use a 1606-XLP50E,

NEC Class 2 switched-mode power supply. The exact steps for other
external power supplies might vary from those described here.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 27

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

1. Verify that the external 24V DC power source is not powered.

2. Mount the external 24V DC power source on a DIN rail.

The external 24V DC power source can be installed on the same DIN rail
as the controller or a separate DIN rail.

3. Connect wires to the appropriate 24V DC+ and 24V DC- connections on
the external 24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

NCok
DC 24-28V 50W max.
DC
ok

24-
28V

NEC Class 2
P S l

4. Pull the removable connector off of the CompactLogix 5370 L1

controller.

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

28 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

5. Connect the wire connected to the 24V DC+ terminal on the external
24V DC power source to the VDC+ terminal, that is, the top terminal, on
the removable connector.

32240-M

6. Connect the wire connected to the 24V DC- terminal on the external 24V
DC power source to the VDC- terminal, that is, the terminal that is
second from the top, on the removable connector.

32240-M

IMPORTANT If your application requires a power control device, for example, a

switch or relay, between the external 24V DC power source and the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller to control when the controller is
powered, you must install the power control device at the VDC+
terminal on the removable connector.
If you install the power control device at the VDC- terminal, the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller may not power up or power down
properly.

7. Plug the removable connector back into the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 29

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

8. Secure the removable connector in place.

9. Turn power on to the external 24V DC power source.

The following graphic shows an external 24V DC power source connected to a

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

DC ok
DC 24-28V 50W max.
DC 00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
ok

24-
28V

NEC Class 2
Power Supply

30 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller Chapter 1

Connect to the Controller via The controller has a USB port that uses a Type B receptacle. The port is USB
2.0-compatible and operates at 12 Mbps.
a USB Cable
Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the USB port. With this
connection, you can upgrade firmware and download programs to the controller
directly from your computer.

ATTENTION: The USB port is intended for temporary local programming

purposes only and not intended for permanent connection.
The USB cable is not to exceed 3.0 m (9.84 ft) and must not contain hubs.

WARNING: Do not use the USB port in hazardous locations.

Plug the USB cable into the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

32234-M

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 31

Chapter 1 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controller

Connect the Controller to an WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with
EtherNet/IP Network power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc
can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

Connect the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable to one of the Ethernet ports
on the controller. The ports are on the bottom of the controller.

Bottom of Controller
Port 1 - Front

Port 2 - Back

32235-M

IMPORTANT This example shows how to connect the controller to the network through one
port. Depending on your application’s network topology, you might connect
both ports of the controller to the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on EtherNet/IP network topologies, see page 120.

Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers have embedded switch technology and two

EtherNet/IP ports that let you use it in various EtherNet/IP network topologies:
• Device-level ring network topology - Both ports on the controller are
connected to the network.
• Linear network topology - Both ports on the controller are connected to
the network.
• Star network topology - One port on the controller is connected to
the network.

There are specific connection and configuration requirements for each

EtherNet/IP network topology.

For more information, see EtherNet/IP Network Topologies on page 120.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 2

Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Topic Page
Before You Begin 36
Install the Secure Digital Card 39
Install the System 41
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable 52
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network 53

ATTENTION: Environment and Enclosure

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined
in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated
disturbances.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those
specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from
accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame,
complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if nonmetallic. The interior of the enclosure must be
accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific
enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 33

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B,
I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs
When combining products within a system, the most adverse produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé
determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les
of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD -
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
been removed or the area is known to be
nonhazardous. de débrancher l'équipement.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
unless power has been removed or the area is
known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à
connections that mate to this equipment by using l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs
screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or
other means provided with this product. filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit.
• La substitution de composants peut rendre cet
• Substitution of components may impair suitability équipement inadapté à une utilisation en
for Class I, Division 2.
environnement de Classe I, Division 2.
• If this product contains batteries, they must only
• S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non
be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. dangereux avant de changer les piles.

34 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when
applied in Zone 2 environments.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not open when energized." After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these
guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 35

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Before You Begin Consider the following before installing a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller:

• The control system includes a controller, an embedded power supply,

embedded I/O points, and a 1769-ECR right end cap.

• The embedded power supply is a 24V DC input, isolated power supply.

• You must connect an external Class 2 or SELV-approved power supply to

provide 24V DC power to the system.

For example, you can use a 1606-XLSDNET4, standard switched-mode

power supply, as shown in this chapter.

• The controllers have embedded I/O points. You wire the input and output
points via a removable connector.

• The controller supports the use of up to four Compact I/O™ modules on

the local 1769 CompactBus backplane as local expansion modules.

For more information on using embedded I/O points and local

expansion modules, see Chapter 8, Use I/O Modules with
CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers on page 179.

• You must terminate the end of the CompactBus via a 1769-ECR right end
cap as shown in step 6 on page 47.

• You cannot remove nor install Compact I/O modules while the controller
is powered.

ATTENTION: CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems do not support

removal and insertion under power (RIUP). Removing a 1769 Compact
I/O module or end cap will generate a controller fault and may also
result in damage to system components.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

The following graphic shows CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers with local

expansion modules installed.
1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QB1B

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1

Embedded I/O Module NC NC

+V +V
Local Expansion Modules
00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15

Embedded Power COM COM

0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG
Supply Terminals

1769-L24ER-QBFC1B Control System

L24ER 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

QBFC1B A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2

Embedded I/O Modules COM COM

0 1
NC NC
OUT
1
COM COM
0UT
3
Local Expansion Modules
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+

Embedded Power +24VDC COM FG

COM COM
0 1
DC OUT
COM COM
ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG
Supply Terminals

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

QBFC1B A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT

Embedded I/O Modules 0 1

NC NC
1
COM COM
V
3

V
Local Expansion Modules
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I
in
V/I
in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+

Embedded Power COM COM

0 1
DC OUT
COM COM
ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG
Supply Terminals

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 37

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Parts

These parts are included in the box when you order your controller:
• Controller - Specific catalog number varies by order

• 1769-ECR Compact I/O End Cap/Terminator

• 1784-SD1 Secure Digital (SD) card with 1 GB of memory storage

A 1784-SD2 SD card with 2 GB of memory storage, or additional

1784-SD1 SD cards, are also available if you need additional memory.

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of flash media is strongly dependent on the

number of write cycles that are performed. Flash media use wear
leveling but users should avoid frequent writes.
Avoiding frequent writes is particularly important when logging data.
We recommend that you log data to a buffer in your controller’s
memory and limit the number of times data is written to removable
media.

Installation Summary To install a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller, follow these steps.

1. Install the Secure Digital Card.

2. Install the System.
3. Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable.
4. Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Install the Secure The CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller is shipped from the factory with the
1784-SD1 SD card installed.
Digital Card
Complete these steps to re-install an SD card that has been removed from the
controller back into the controller or if installing a new SD card into the
controller.

WARNING: When you insert or remove the SD card while power is on, an
electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

1. Verify that the SD card is locked or unlocked according to your preference.

Consider these when deciding to lock the card before installation:
– If the card is unlocked, the controller can write data to it or read data
from it.
– If the card is locked, the controller can only read data from it and you
may experience issues when updating the firmware on your controller

Unlocked Locked

32005-M

2. Open the door for the SD card.

32253-M

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 39

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

3. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

You can install the SD card in one orientation only. The beveled corner
should be at the bottom.

If you feel resistance when inserting the SD card, pull it out and change the
orientation.

4. Gently press the card until it clicks into place.

32254-M

5. Close the SD card door.

32255-M

We recommend you keep the SD card door closed during normal system
operation. For more information on using the SD card, see Use a Secure
Digital Card on page 301.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Install the System Complete the following tasks to install the CompactLogix 5370 L2
control system:
• Mount the System
• Ground the System
• Install the Controller
• Connect Power to the Control System

Mount the System

You can mount a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system on a DIN rail or

a panel.

WARNING: When used in a Class I, Division 2, hazardous location, this

equipment must be mounted in a suitable enclosure with proper wiring
method that complies with the governing electrical codes.

Before you mount a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, consider

the following requirements:
• Available DIN Rails
• Minimum Spacing
• System Dimensions

Available DIN Rails

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc-plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

You can mount the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller on the following

DIN rails:
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 41

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Minimum Spacing

Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, and adjacent equipment. Allow
50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides, as shown. This provides ventilation and
electrical isolation.

50 mm
Top (2 in.)

50 mm 50 mm

CompactLogix 5370 L2

Supply and I/O Points

(2 in.) (2 in.)

Embedded Power

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module
Controller with

End Cap
Side Side

Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

System Dimensions

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L24ER-QB1B controller.
35.00 mm
(1.38 in.)
105 mm 115.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (4.53 in.)

L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE

QB1B
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

118.00 mm 06 14
07 15

(4.65 in.) COM COM

0 1
NC NC

+V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

32260-M

42 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L24ER-QBFC1B controller.
35.00 mm
(1.38 in.)
105 mm 140.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (5.51 in.)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
QBFC1B

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

118.00 mm 06 14
07 15
+V
OUT
0
+V
OUT
2
OUT 0UT

(4.65 in.) COM COM

0 1
NC NC
1
COM COM
V
3

V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG
32260-M

This graphic shows the system dimensions for the

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.
35.00 mm
(1.38 in.)
105 mm 140.00 mm
(4.13 in.) (5.51 in.)
L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
QBFC1B SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

118.00 mm 06 14
07 15
+V
OUT
0
+V
OUT
2
COM COM OUT 0UT

(4.65 in.) 0 1
NC NC
1
COM COM
V V
3

+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
V
CJC in
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I
in
V/I
in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG

32260-M

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 43

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Mount the Controller on a Panel

Use two M4 or #8 panhead screws to mount the controller. Mounting screws are
required on every module. Use this procedure to use the assembled modules as a
template for drilling holes in the panel.

IMPORTANT Due to module mounting hole tolerance, it is important to follow these

procedures.

1. On a clean work surface, assemble no more than three modules.

2. Using the assembled modules as a template, carefully mark the center of all
module-mounting holes on the panel.
3. Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface, including any
previously mounted modules.
4. Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or #8 screw.
5. Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment.

TIP The grounding plate, that is, where you install the mounting screws,
grounds the module when it is panel-mounted.

6. Use the mounting screws to attach the modules to the panel.

TIP If you are mounting more modules, mount only the last one of this group
and put the others aside. This reduces remounting time when you are
drilling and tapping the next group of modules.
7. Repeat steps 1…6 for any remaining modules.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Mount the Controller on the DIN Rail

You can mount the controller on the following DIN rails:

• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

1. Hook the DIN rail latch at the top of the back of the controller on the
DIN rail.
2. Swing the controller downward until it touches the DIN rail and press the
controller against the DIN rail until it clicks in place.

Ground the System

ATTENTION: This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded

mounting surface such as a metal panel. Additional grounding connections
from the power supply's mounting tabs or DIN rail (if used) are not required
unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell
Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional information.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 45

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Install the Controller

Complete these steps to install the controller.

1. Pull the bottom locking tabs out.

L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
QBFC1B

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC V
02 10 + in
3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG

32256-M

2. Hook the top of the controller on the DIN rail.

3. Swing it downward until the controller is flush against the DIN rail and
push it down against the DIN rail.
4. Push the controller against the DIN rail.
5. Push the locking tabs in.

L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

QBFC1B
IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I
in
V/I
in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG

32257-M

46 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

6. If you are not using local expansion modules, slide the 1769-ECR end cap
onto the right side of the controller.

IMPORTANT You must install an end cap onto the right side of the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller system either at the end of the
controller or at the end of any local expansion modules that may be
installed onto the controller.
The covering covers the exposed interconnections on the right side of
the controller. Failure to use a protective covering could result in
equipment damage or injury from electric shock.

32258-M

7. Push the end cap locking mechanism to the right to lock it onto
the controller.

32267-M

If you are using local expansion modules, see Local Expansion Modules -
Optional on page 210 for more information on installing them in a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 47

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Connect Power to the Control System

You must connect an external Class 2 or SELV-listed power supply to the

controller’s embedded power supply. The external power supply converts 115/
230V AC power to 24V DC.

WARNING: Do not connect directly to line voltage. Line voltage must be

supplied by a suitable, approved isolating transformer or power supply having
short circuit capacity not exceeding 100 VA maximum or equivalent.

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370

L2 controller’s embedded power supply only.

For information on how to wire the embedded I/O module available on

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, see Embedded I/O Modules on
page 180.

• An external power supply must reside in the same enclosure as the

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

If the external power supply and controller are located in separate

enclosures, an electrical arc can occur when power is applied.

• Not all Class 2 or SELV-listed power supplies are certified for use in all
applications, for example, use in both nonhazardous and hazardous
environments.

Before installing an external power supply, consult all specification and

certification information to verify that you are using an acceptable external
power supply.

• This section describes how to wire terminals +24VDC and COM on the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller. They are the only terminals you wire
to power the CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

You should only use the FG terminal as appropriate when connecting a

field device to the controller.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

For example purposes, this section uses a 1606-XLDNET4, standard switched-

mode power supply.

IMPORTANT The 1606-XLDNET4 power supply is not certified for use in all applications, for
example, you cannot use it in hazardous locations. Read the points in Connect
Power to the Control System on page 48 before choosing the external power
supply for your application.

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L2

control system.

1. Verify that the external 24V DC power source is not powered.

2. Mount the external 24V DC power source on a DIN rail.

The external 24V DC power source can be installed on the same DIN rail
as the controller or a separate DIN rail.

3. Connect wires to the appropriate 24V DC+ and 24V DC- connections on
the external 24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

4. Strip 8 mm (0.31 in) insulation from the end of the wire that you will
connect to the +24VDC terminal on the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 49

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

5. Connect the wire from the 24V DC+ terminal on the external 24V DC
power source to the +24VDC terminal on the controller.

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
QBFC1B A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM

+24VDC COM FG +V +V
V V
in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I
in
V/I
in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

6. Strip 8 mm (0.31 in) insulation from the end of the wire that you will
connect to the COM terminal on the controller.
7. Connect the wire from the 24V DC- terminal on the external 24V DC
power source to the COM terminal on the controller.

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
QBFC1B A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I
in
V/I
in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

IMPORTANT If your application requires a power control device, for example, a switch or
relay, between the external power supply and the CompactLogix 5370 L2
controller’s embedded power supply to control when the controller is powered,
you must install the power control device at the +24VDC terminal on the
controller.
If you install the power control device at the COM terminal, the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller may not power up or power down properly.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

The following graphic shows an external 24V DC power source connected to a

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
QBFC1B
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
NEC Class 2 0 1 1 3
Power Supply NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
US LISTED 00 08 in in
0+ 2+
18WM
V/I V/I
IND.CONT.EO. 01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
N L 07 15
I I
OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

IMPORTANT When you remove power from the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller to cycle
power, the controller’s OK status indicator remains lit briefly as the controller
passes through its shutdown sequence.
Do not reapply power from the external power supply to the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller’s embedded power supply until after the
controller’s OK status indicator is off.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 51

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Connect to the Controller via The controller has a USB port that uses a Type B receptacle. The port is USB
2.0-compatible and operates at 12 Mbps.
a USB Cable
Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the USB port. With this
connection, you can upgrade firmware and download programs to the controller
directly from your computer.

ATTENTION: The USB port is intended for temporary local programming

purposes only and not intended for permanent connection.
The USB cable is not to exceed 3.0 m (9.84 ft) and must not contain hubs.

WARNING: Do not use the USB port in hazardous locations.

Plug the USB cable into the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

32259-M

52 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller Chapter 2

Connect the Controller to an WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communication cable with
EtherNet/IP Network power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc
can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

Connect the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable to one of the Ethernet ports
on the controller. The ports are on the bottom of the controller.

ATTENTION: Do not plug a DH-485 network cable or a NAP cable into the
Ethernet port. Undesirable behavior and/or damage to the port may result.

Bottom of Controller

Port 1 - Front
Port 2 - Back

32261-M

IMPORTANT This example shows how to connect the controller to the network through one
port. Depending on your application’s network topology, you might connect
both ports of the controller to the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on EtherNet/IP network topologies, see page 120.

Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers have embedded switch technology and two

EtherNet/IP ports that let you use it in various EtherNet/IP network topologies:
• Device-level ring network topology - Both ports on the controller are
connected to the network.
• Linear network topology - Both ports on the controller are connected to
the network.
• Star network topology - One port on the controller is connected to
the network.

There are specific connection and configuration requirements for each

EtherNet/IP network topology.

For more information, see EtherNet/IP Network Topologies on page 120.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 53

Chapter 2 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controller

Notes:

54 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 3

Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Topic Page
Before You Begin 58
Install the Secure Digital Card 61
Install the System 63
Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable 72
Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network 73

ATTENTION: Environment and Enclosure

This equipment is intended for use in a Pollution Degree 2 industrial environment, in overvoltage Category II applications (as defined
in IEC 60664-1), at altitudes up to 2000 m (6562 ft) without derating.
This equipment is considered Group 1, Class A industrial equipment according to IEC/CISPR 11. Without appropriate precautions,
there may be difficulties with electromagnetic compatibility in residential and other environments due to conducted and radiated
disturbances.
This equipment is supplied as open-type equipment. It must be mounted within an enclosure that is suitably designed for those
specific environmental conditions that will be present and appropriately designed to prevent personal injury resulting from
accessibility to live parts. The enclosure must have suitable flame-retardant properties to prevent or minimize the spread of flame,
complying with a flame spread rating of 5VA, V2, V1, V0 (or equivalent) if nonmetallic. The interior of the enclosure must be
accessible only by the use of a tool. Subsequent sections of this publication may contain additional information regarding specific
enclosure type ratings that are required to comply with certain product safety certifications.
In addition to this publication, see the following:
• Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1, for additional installation requirements
• NEMA Standard 250 and IEC 60529, as applicable, for explanations of the degrees of protection provided by enclosures

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 55

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

North American Hazardous Location Approval

The following information applies when operating this equipment in Informations sur l’utilisation de cet équipement en environnements
hazardous locations. dangereux.
Les produits marqués "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" ne conviennent qu'à
Products marked "CL I, DIV 2, GP A, B, C, D" are suitable for use in Class une utilisation en environnements de Classe I Division 2 Groupes A, B,
I Division 2 Groups A, B, C, D, Hazardous Locations and nonhazardous C, D dangereux et non dangereux. Chaque produit est livré avec des
locations only. Each product is supplied with markings on the rating marquages sur sa plaque d'identification qui indiquent le code de
nameplate indicating the hazardous location temperature code. température pour les environnements dangereux. Lorsque plusieurs
When combining products within a system, the most adverse produits sont combinés dans un système, le code de température le
temperature code (lowest "T" number) may be used to help plus défavorable (code de température le plus faible) peut être utilisé
determine the overall temperature code of the system. Combinations pour déterminer le code de température global du système. Les
of equipment in your system are subject to investigation by the local combinaisons d'équipements dans le système sont sujettes à
Authority Having Jurisdiction at the time of installation. inspection par les autorités locales qualifiées au moment de
l'installation.
AVERTISSEMENT: RISQUE D’EXPLOSION –
WARNING: EXPLOSION HAZARD -
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has • Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
been removed or the area is known to be
nonhazardous. de débrancher l'équipement.
• Couper le courant ou s'assurer que
• Do not disconnect connections to this equipment l'environnement est classé non dangereux avant
unless power has been removed or the area is
known to be nonhazardous. Secure any external de débrancher les connecteurs. Fixer tous les
connecteurs externes reliés à cet équipement à
connections that mate to this equipment by using l'aide de vis, loquets coulissants, connecteurs
screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or
other means provided with this product. filetés ou autres moyens fournis avec ce produit.
• La substitution de composants peut rendre cet
• Substitution of components may impair suitability équipement inadapté à une utilisation en
for Class I, Division 2.
environnement de Classe I, Division 2.
• If this product contains batteries, they must only
• S'assurer que l'environnement est classé non
be changed in an area known to be nonhazardous. dangereux avant de changer les piles.

56 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

European Hazardous Location Approval

The following applies when the product bears the Ex Marking.
This equipment is intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres as defined by European Union Directive 94/9/EC and has been found to
comply with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements relating to the design and construction of Category 3 equipment intended for use in
Zone 2 potentially explosive atmospheres, given in Annex II to this Directive.
Compliance with the Essential Health and Safety Requirements has been assured by compliance with EN 60079-15 and EN 60079-0.
ATTENTION: This equipment is not resistant to sunlight or other sources of UV radiation.
WARNING:
• This equipment must be installed in an enclosure providing at least IP54 protection when applied in Zone 2 environments.
• This equipment shall be used within its specified ratings defined by Rockwell Automation.
• Provision shall be made to prevent the rated voltage from being exceeded by transient disturbances of more than 40% when
applied in Zone 2 environments.
• Secure any external connections that mate to this equipment by using screws, sliding latches, threaded connectors, or other
means provided with this product.
• Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been removed or the area is known to be nonhazardous.
• Enclosure must be marked with the following: "Warning - Do not open when energized." After installation of equipment into
the enclosure, access to termination compartments shall be dimensioned so that conductors can be readily connected.

ATTENTION: Prevent Electrostatic Discharge

This equipment is sensitive to electrostatic discharge, which can cause internal damage and affect normal operation. Follow these
guidelines when you handle this equipment:
• Touch a grounded object to discharge potential static.
• Wear an approved grounding wriststrap.
• Do not touch connectors or pins on component boards.
• Do not touch circuit components inside the equipment.
• Use a static-safe workstation, if available.
• Store the equipment in appropriate static-safe packaging when not in use.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 57

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Before You Begin Consider the following when planning your CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system:

• The controller is always the leftmost device in the system.

• Only one controller can be used on a local 1769 CompactBus. The

controller supports the local bank and up to two more additional banks.

• The controller has a power supply distance rating of four. This rating
means the controller must be within four slots of the power supply, that is,
you can install as many as three modules between the power supply and the
controller, as shown below.

1769-L 33ERM Controller Compact I/O Modules

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

• The controllers support this many local expansion modules across multiple
I/O banks.

Cat. No. Local Expansion Modules Supported, max

1769- L30ER 8
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 16
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 30

• Each I/O bank requires its own power supply.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

• You must terminate the end of the last bank in a CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system. Depending on your system design, you may need to
terminate a bank at the left or right end of the bank.

A 1769-ECx end cap is required to terminate the end of the last bank in
the control system.

For example, if a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system uses a single

bank, you must use a 1769-ECR right end cap to terminate the right end of
the bank.

For graphics of CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems that use a single

bank or multiple banks, see Mount the System on page 66.

ATTENTION: The CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems do not support

removal and insertion under power (RIUP). These events will occur
while the CompactLogix system is under power:
• Any break in the connection between the power supply and the
controller, for example, removing the power supply, controller, or an I/O
module, may subject the logic circuitry to transient conditions above
the normal design thresholds and may result in damage to system
components or unexpected behavior.
• Removing an end cap or an I/O module faults the controller and may
also result in damage to system components.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 59

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Parts

These parts are included in the box when you order your controller:
• Controller - Specific catalog number varies by order

• 1769-ECR Compact I/O End Cap/Terminator

• 1784-SD1 Secure Digital (SD) card with 1 GB of memory storage

A 1784-SD2 SD card with 2 GB of memory storage, or additional

1784-SD1 SD cards, are also available if you need additional memory.

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of flash media is strongly dependent on the

number of write cycles that are performed. Flash media controllers use
wear leveling but users should avoid frequent writes.
Avoiding frequent writes is particularly important when logging data.
We recommend that you log data to a buffer in your controller’s
memory and limit the number of times data is written to removable
media.

Installation Summary To install a CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller, follow these steps.

• Install the Secure Digital Card
• Install the System
• Connect to the Controller via a USB Cable.
• Connect the Controller to an EtherNet/IP Network.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Install the Secure The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers ship from the factory with the
1784-SD1 SD card installed.
Digital Card
Complete these steps to re-install an SD card that has been removed from the
controller back into the controller or if installing a new SD card into the
controller.

WARNING: When you insert or remove the Secure Digital (SD) Card while
power is on, an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in
hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

1. Verify that the SD card is locked or unlocked according to your preference.

Consider these when deciding to lock the card before installation:
– If the card is unlocked, the controller can write data to it or read data
from it.
– If the card is locked, the controller can only read data from it and you
may experience issues when updating the firmware on your controller.

Unlocked Locked

32005-M

2. Open the door for the SD card.

32163-M

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 61

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

3. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

You can install the SD card in one orientation only. The beveled corner
should be at the top. An orientation logo is printed on the card.

If you feel resistance when inserting the SD card, pull it out and change the
orientation.

4. Gently press the card until it clicks into place.

32164-M

5. Close the SD card door.

32165-M

We recommend you keep the SD card door closed during normal system
operation. For more information on using the SD card, see Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Install the System Complete the following steps to install the CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system.
• Assemble the System
• Mount the System
• Ground the System
• Connect Power to the Control System

Assemble the System

You can attach an adjacent Compact I/O module or 1769 Compact I/O power
supply to a CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller before or after mounting. For
mounting instructions, see Ground the System on page 69 or Mount the
Controller on a Panel on page 70.

ATTENTION: Do not remove or replace this module while power is applied.

Interruption of the backplane can result in unintentional operation or
machine motion.

WARNING: Remove power before removing or inserting this module. If you

insert or remove the module while backplane power is on, an electrical arc can
occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

This section describes how to assemble a local bank.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 63

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Complete these steps to install the controller. This example describes how to
attach a 1769 Compact I/O power supply to the controller.

1. Verify line power is disconnected.

2. Make sure that the bus lever of the 1769 Compact I/O power supply is in
the unlocked position, that is, leaning to the right.

t)
on
1 (Fr ear)
2 (R

3. Use the upper and lower tongue-and-groove slots to secure the controller
and power supply together.

Tongue-and-groove Slots
)
ront
1 (F ear)
2 (R

4. Move the power supply back along the tongue-and-groove slots until the
bus connectors line up with each other.
5. Use your fingers or a small screwdriver to push the power supply’s bus lever
back slightly to clear the positioning tab.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

6. Move the power supply’s bus lever fully to the left until it clicks; making
sure it locks.

1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

7. If your system does not use any local expansion modules, use the tongue-
and-groove slots described earlier to attach a 1769-ECR Compact I/O end
cap terminator to the last module in the system.

IMPORTANT You must install an end cap onto the right side of the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller system either at the end of the
controller or at the end of any local expansion modules that may be
installed onto the controller.
The covering covers the exposed interconnections on the right side of
the controller. Failure to use a protective covering could result in
equipment damage or injury from electric shock.

8. Wire the 1769 Compact I/O power supply according to the directions in
the Compact I/O Expansion Power Supplies installation instructions,
publication 1769-IN028.

If you are using local expansion modules, see Local Expansion Modules on
page 238.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 65

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Mount the System

You can mount a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system on a DIN rail or on

a panel.

ATTENTION: During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices, be sure that all
debris (such as metal chips or wire strands) is kept from falling into the
controller. Debris that falls into the controller could cause damage while the
controller is energized.

A CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system must be mounted so that the modules

are horizontal to each other. If you separate modules into multiple banks, the
banks can be vertical or horizontal to each other.

The following example shows example systems with local expansion

modules included.

Figure 1 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

Horizontal Orientation
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

Bank 1 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 2 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 3

Bank 1
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

1769-CRRx Cable
Vertical Orientation

Bank 2

66 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Before you mount a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system, consider

the following:
• Minimum Spacing
• System Dimensions
• Power Supply Distance Rating

Minimum Spacing

Maintain spacing from enclosure walls, wireways, and adjacent equipment. Allow
50 mm (2 in.) of space on all sides, as shown. This provides ventilation and
electrical isolation.

Top 50 mm
(2 in.)

CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

50 mm 50 mm

Compact I/O Module

Compact I/O Module

(2 in.) (2 in.)

Power Supply

End Cap
Side Side

Bottom 50 mm
(2 in.)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 67

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

System Dimensions

This graphic shows the system dimensions.

55 mm 70 mm 35 mm
(2.17 in.) (2.76 in.) (1.38 in.)

132 mm
(5.20 in.)
118 mm
(4.65 in.)

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

52.5 mm 35 mm 35 mm 35 mm 35 mm
(2.07 in.) (1.38 in.) (1.38 in.) (1.38 in.) (1.38 in.) 32150-M

105 mm
(4.13 in.)

32247-M

68 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers, Compact I/O modules, and the Compact I/

O 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner module have power supply distance ratings.
Power supply distance ratings determine how many slots in a bank that a device
can be from the power supply.

For example, a product with a power supply distance rating of four can only have
up to three slots between it and the power supply.
Device Power Supply Distance Rating
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller
4
1769 Compact I/O DeviceNet scanner
Compact I/O module 4…8, depending on module
For more information about the power supply distance
rating for a Compact I/O module, see CompactLogix
Selection Guide, publication 1769-SG001

CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers must be the leftmost device in the control

system, and the system only allows up to three modules between the controller
and the power supply. Power supply distance ratings are more critical for other
modules that might be installed with the CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system:

• For more information on considering a 1769-SDN scanner module’s

power supply distance rating when designing a CompactLogix 5370 L3
control system, see Power Supply Distance Rating on page 134.

• For more information on considering a Compact I/O module’s power

supply distance rating when designing a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control
system, see Power Supply Distance Rating on page 250.

Ground the System

ATTENTION: This product is intended to be mounted to a well-grounded

mounting surface such as a metal panel. Additional grounding connections
from the power supply's mounting tabs or DIN rail (if used) are not required
unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded.
Refer to Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Rockwell
Automation publication 1770-4.1, for additional information.

For more information, refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding
Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 69

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Mount the Controller on a Panel

Use two M4 or #8 panhead screws to mount the controller. Mounting screws are
required on every module. Use this procedure to use the assembled modules as a
template for drilling holes in the panel.

IMPORTANT Due to module mounting hole tolerance, it is important to follow these

procedures.

1. On a clean work surface, assemble no more than three modules.

2. Using the assembled modules as a template, carefully mark the center of all
module-mounting holes on the panel.
3. Return the assembled modules to the clean work surface, including any
previously mounted modules.
4. Drill and tap the mounting holes for the recommended M4 or #8 screw.
5. Place the modules back on the panel and check for proper hole alignment.

TIP The grounding plate, that is, where you install the mounting screws,
grounds the module when it is panel-mounted.

6. Use the mounting screws to attach the modules to the panel.

TIP If you are mounting more modules, mount only the last one of this group
and put the others aside. This reduces remounting time when you are
drilling and tapping the next group of modules.
7. Repeat steps 1…6 for any remaining modules.

70 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Mount the Controller on the DIN Rail

You can mount the controller on the following DIN rails:

• EN 50 022 - 35 x 7.5 mm (1.38 x 0.30 in.)
• EN 50 022 - 35 x 15 mm (1.38 x 0.59 in.)

ATTENTION: This product is grounded through the DIN rail to chassis ground.
Use zinc plated yellow-chromate steel DIN rail to assure proper grounding.
The use of other DIN rail materials (for example, aluminum or plastic) that
can corrode, oxidize, or are poor conductors, can result in improper or
intermittent grounding. Secure DIN rail to mounting surface approximately
every 200 mm (7.8 in.) and use end-anchors appropriately.

1. Before mounting the controller on a DIN rail, close the controller’s DIN
rail latches.
2. Press the DIN rail mounting area of the controller against the DIN rail.

The latches momentarily open and lock into place.

Connect Power to the Control System

Connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system based on 1769

Compact I/O power supply your application uses. For more information on
connecting power to your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system, see the
Compact I/O Expansion Power Supplies Installation Instructions, publication
1769-IN028.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 71

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Connect to the Controller The controller has a USB port that uses a Type B receptacle. The port is USB
2.0-compatible and operates at 12 Mbps.
via a USB Cable
Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the USB port. With this
connection, you can upgrade firmware and download programs to the controller
directly from your computer.

ATTENTION: The USB port is intended for temporary local programming

purposes only and not intended for permanent connection.
The USB cable is not to exceed 3.0 m (9.84 ft) and must not contain hubs.

WARNING: Do not use the USB port in hazardous locations.

Plug the USB cable into the CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller as shown.

32152-M

72 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller Chapter 3

Connect the Controller to an WARNING: If you connect or disconnect the communications cable with
EtherNet/IP Network power applied to this module or any device on the network, an electrical arc
can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

Connect the RJ45 connector of the Ethernet cable to one of the Ethernet ports
on the controller. The ports are on the bottom of the controller.

ATTENTION: Do not plug a DH-485 network cable or a NAP cable into the
Ethernet port. Undesirable behavior and/or damage to the port may result.

Bottom of Controller

Port 1 - Front

Port 2 - Rear
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

IMPORTANT This example shows how to connect the controller to the network through one
port. Depending on your application’s EtherNet network topology, you might
connect both ports of the controller to the EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on EtherNet/IP network topologies, see page 120.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 73

Chapter 3 Install the CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controller

Connecting to Different EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers have embedded switch technology and

two EtherNet/IP ports that let you to use it in different EtherNet/IP
network topologies:

• Device-level Ring network topology - Both ports on the controller are

connected to the network with requirements about how the connections
are made.

• Linear network topology - Both ports on the controller are connected to

the network with requirements about how the connections are made.

• Star network topology - One port on the controller is connected to

the network.

For more information, see EtherNet/IP Network Topologies on page 120.

74 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 4

Complete Software Tasks Required at

CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Topic Page
Set a Controller’s IP Address 77
Change a Controller’s IP Address 89
Load the Controller Firmware 93
Select the Controller’s Operating Mode 103

To complete the tasks described in this chapter, you must have the software
described in the following table installed on your computer.

Software Required Version

RSLinx® Classic 2.59.00 or later(1)
RSLogix 5000 20.xx.xx - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers using firmware
revision 20.xxx.
Studio 5000 environment 21.00.00 or later - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers using firmware
revision 21.000 or later.
BOOTP-DHCP server Most current version is installed with RSLinx Classic software installation
ControlFLASH™ Installed with the installation of either of the following:
• RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx
• Studio 5000 environment, version 21.00.00 or later
(1) CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers require RSLinx Classic software, version 2.59.01 or later.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers require a network Internet Protocol (IP) address

to operate on an EtherNet/IP network.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 75

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

The IP address uniquely identifies the controller. The IP address is in the form
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx where each xxx is a number from 000…254 with some
exceptions for reserved values. These numbers are examples of reserved values
you cannot use:

• 000.xxx.xxx.xxx

• 127.xxx.xxx.xxx

• 224 to 255.xxx.xxx.xxx

Some other specific values are reserved based on an application-by-application

basis.

Depending on system conditions, you may need to complete one of these tasks:

• Set the IP address for a controller that does not have one assigned.

• Change the IP address for a controller that already has an IP address

assigned to it.

IMPORTANT CompactLogix 5370 controllers have two EtherNet/IP ports to connect to an

EtherNet/IP network. The ports carry the same network traffic as part of the
controller’s embedded switch. However, the controller uses only one IP
address.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Set a Controller’s IP Address You must set a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s IP address when the controller
powers up for the first time, that is, when commissioning the controller for the
first time. You are not required to set an IP address each time power is cycled to
the controller.

You can use these tools to set a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s IP address:
• Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server
• RSLinx Classic software
• Logix Designer application
• SD card

IMPORTANT Each tool has connection requirements to set the controller’s IP address via that
tool. For example, your computer must be connected to the controller via a USB
cable to set the controller’s initial IP address with RSLinx Classic software or the
application.

This graphic describes how to set your CompactLogix 5370 controller’s IP

address on a power cycle during initial installation or after operation has begun.

Controller Power Cycle

Use USB driver in Yes Computer

RSLinx Classic or the connected to
application to set controller via
the address. USB?

Does controller have IP

address in Flash memory
Connect computer to No or is an SD card installed
controller via USB. No that is configured to load
a project (with a valid IP
address) to the controller
No on a power cycle?

No
Is controller Is controller
DHCP- enabled? BOOTP- enabled?
Yes

Yes Yes

Use DHCP to set Use BOOTP server to

Controller has an IP address.
the IP address. set the IP address.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 77

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use the BOOTP Server to Set the Controller’s IP Address

Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) is a protocol that allows the controller to

communicate with a BOOTP server. The server can be used to assign an IP
address. You can use the BOOTP server to set an IP address for your
CompactLogix 5370 controller.

Consider these points when using the BOOTP server:

• The BOOTP server is installed automatically when you install RSLinx

Classic or RSLogix 5000 software on your computer. The BOOTP server
sets an IP address and other Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
parameters.

• A CompactLogix 5370 controller ships from the factory without an IP

address and BOOTP-enabled.

• This section describes how to use a BOOTP/DHCP server offered by

Rockwell Automation. If you use a different BOOTP/DHCP server,
contact your network administrator to verify you are using it correctly.

• To use the BOOTP server, your computer and the controller must be
connected to the same EtherNet/IP network.

• If the controller is BOOTP-disabled, you cannot use the BOOTP server

to set the IP address.

There are two conditions in which the CompactLogix 5370 controllers use the
BOOTP servers to set the controller’s IP address:

• Initial powerup - Because the CompactLogix 5370 controller ships with

BOOTP-enabled, when it is first powered up, the controller sends a
request for an IP address on the EtherNet/IP network. You can use the
BOOTP server to set the IP address, as described later in this section.

• Powerup after controller operation has begun - When controller power

is cycled after operation has begun, the BOOTP/DHCP server sets the IP
address if either of these conditions exists:

– Controller is BOOTP-enabled - You set the IP address manually with

the BOOTP server.
– Controller is DHCP-enabled - The IP address is set automatically via
the DHCP server.

78 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Access the BOOTP/DHCP utility from one of these locations:

• Start>Programs>Rockwell Software>BOOTP-DHCP Server
If you have not installed the utility, you can download and install it from
http://www.ab.com/networks/ethernet/bootp.html.

• Tools directory on the programming software installation CD

IMPORTANT Before you start the BOOTP/DHCP utility, make sure you have the controller’s hardware (MAC) address. The hardware address is on
the front of the controller and uses an address in a format similar to the following:
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Controller 1769-L24ER-QB1B Controller 1769-L33ER Controller

L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QB1B

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
+24VDC COM FG 2 (Rear)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 79

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Complete these steps to set the controller’s IP address with the

BOOTP/DHCP server.

1. Choose Start>Programs>Rockwell Software>BOOTP/

DHCP Server>BOOTP/DHCP Server.
2. From the Tools menu, choose Network Settings.

3. Type the Subnet Mask of the network.

The Gateway address, Primary and/or Secondary DNS address, and

Domain Name fields are optional.
4. Click OK.

The Request History panel appears with the hardware addresses of all
devices issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests.
5. Select the line with the same MAC address as your controller.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

6. Click Add to Relation List.

The New Entry dialog box appears.

7. Type an IP Address, Hostname, and Description for the controller.

8. Click OK.
9. To permanently assign this configuration to the controller, wait for the
controller to appear in the Relation List panel and select it.
10. Click Disable BOOTP/DHCP.

When power is cycled, the controller uses the assigned configuration and
does not issue a BOOTP request.

IMPORTANT If you do not click Disable BOOTP/DHCP, on a power cycle, the host
controller clears the current IP configuration and begins sending
BOOTP requests again.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 81

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use the DHCP Server to Set the Controller’s IP Address

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server automatically assigns IP

addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP/IP network. DHCP is based on
BOOTP and maintains some backward compatibility. The main difference is
that BOOTP allows for manual configuration (static), while DHCP allows for
both static and dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to
newly attached controllers.

Be cautious when using the DHCP server to configure a controller. A BOOTP

client, such as the CompactLogix 5370 controllers, can start from a DHCP
server only if the DHCP server is specifically written to also handle BOOTP
queries. This is specific to the DHCP server used. Consult your system
administrator to see if a DHCP server supports BOOTP commands and manual
IP allocation.

ATTENTION: The CompactLogix 5370 controllers should be assigned a fixed

network address. The IP address of this controller should not be dynamically
provided.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or
loss of process control.

If you use the Rockwell Automation BOOTP or DHCP server in an uplinked

subnet where a DHCP server exists, a controller may get an address from the
enterprise server before the Rockwell Automation utility even sees the controller.
You might have to disconnect from the uplink to set the address and configure
the controller to retain its static address before reconnecting to the uplink.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Use RSLinx Classic Software to Set the Controller’s IP Address

You can use RSLinx Classic software to set the CompactLogix 5370 controller’s
IP address.

IMPORTANT To set the IP address, that is, assign an IP address to a controller that does not
have one, for a CompactLogix 5370 controller via RSLinx Classic software, you
must be connected to your controller via the USB port.

Complete these steps to set the controller’s IP address with RSLinx

Classic software.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps apply to other
CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Make sure a USB cable is connected to your computer and the controller.
2. Start RSLinx Classic software.

After several seconds, an RSWho dialog box should appear.

3. If no RSWho dialog box appears, from the Communications pull-down
menu, choose RSWho.

The RSWho dialog box appears and includes the USB driver.
4. Navigate to the USB network.
5. Right-click the controller and choose Module Configuration.

The Module Configuration dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 83

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

6. Click the Port Configuration tab.

7. For Network Configuration Type, click Static to permanently assign this
configuration to the port.

IMPORTANT If you click Dynamic, on a power cycle, the controller clears the
current IP configuration and resumes sending BOOTP requests or
DHCP requests, depending on the controller configuration.

8. Type the new IP address and Network Mask

9. Click OK.

As with all configuration changes, if desired, make sure you are using the SD card
in a way that it will not overwrite the IP address at the next controller power
cycle.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Use Logix Designer Application to Set the Controller’s IP Address

You can use Logix Designer application to set a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s
IP address. To set the IP address via the application, you must be connected to
your controller via the USB port.

Complete these steps to set the controller’s IP address.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L18ERMBB1B controller. The same steps apply to
other CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Start the application.

2. Set the Project Path.
a. Click RSWho.

The RSWho dialog box appears.

b. Navigate over the USB network and select the

CompactLogix 5370 controller.

c. Click Set Project Path.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 85

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

3. Click Download.

4. Click Download again.

The new project is downloaded to the controller and the project goes
online, in either Remote Program or Program mode.
5. Right-click the controller name and choose Properties.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

6. On the Controller Properties dialog box, click the Internet Protocol tab.

The IP Settings Configuration values show the controller has no IP

address assigned to it.

7. Click Manually configure IP settings.

8. Enter desired IP address and other configuration information and
click OK.

9. When prompted to confirm the IP address setting, click Yes.

The controller now uses the newly-set IP address.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 87

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use the SD Card to Set the Controller’s IP Address

You can use an SD card to set the IP address for a CompactLogix 5370 controller.
Using the SD card to set the IP address eliminates the need for software to
complete this task.

IMPORTANT Setting the IP address from an SD card does not require software during the
power-up process. However, you must have previously saved the project to the
SD card.
The option to set a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s IP address via an SD card at
power-up is only one part of loading an entire project to the controller from the
SD card.
Use this option carefully. For example, the SD card may contain a desirable IP
address as part of an undesirable project, for example, a project that is older
than the project currently used on the controller.

These requirements apply when using the SD card to set the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller:

• A project must already be stored on the SD card.

• The project stored on the SD card is configured with the Load Image
parameter set to On Power Up.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Change a Controller’s You may need to change a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s IP address after
system operation has begun. In this case, the controller already has a valid IP
IP Address address assigned to it but you need to change that IP address.

You can use these tools to change a controller’s IP address:

• RSLinx Classic software
• Logix Designer application
• SD card

IMPORTANT You cannot use any of these tools to change a controller’s IP address:
• Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) server
• Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server

Consider these factors when you determine how to change the controller’s
IP address:
• Network isolation from, or integration into, the plant/enterprise network

• Network size - For large, isolated networks, it might be more convenient

and safer to use a BOOTP/DHCP server rather than RSLogix 5000 or
RSLinx Classic software. A BOOTP/DHCP server limits the possibility
of assigning duplicate IP addresses.

However, you can use the BOOTP/DHCP server only to set the
controller’s IP address and not to change it. If you decide to change the
controller’s IP address and want to use a BOOTP/DHCP server so as to
limit the possibility of assigning duplicate IP addresses, you must first clear
the IP address.

After clearing the IP address, use the steps described at Use the BOOTP
Server to Set the Controller’s IP Address on page 78 or Use the DHCP
Server to Set the Controller’s IP Address on page 82 to set the controller’s
IP address.

• Company policies and procedures dealing with plant floor network

installation and maintenance

• Level of involvement by IT personnel in plant-floor network installation

and maintenance

• Type of training offered to control engineers and maintenance personnel

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 89

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Change the Network IP Address with RSLinx Classic Software

IMPORTANT The steps in Use RSLinx Classic Software to Set the Controller’s IP Address on
page 83 describe how to assign an IP address for a CompactLogix 5370
controller that does not have a valid IP address.
The steps in this section describe how to change the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller that already has a valid IP address assigned to it.

The graphics in this section show how to change the IP address for a
1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps apply to other CompactLogix 5370
controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Right-click the controller and choose Module Configuration.

2. Click the Port Configuration tab when the Module Configuration dialog
box appears.

The controller has a valid IP address and Network Configuration Type.

3. Type a new IP address and make any other desired changes.
4. To permanently assign this configuration to the controller, click Static in
the Network Configuration Type section of the dialog box.

IMPORTANT If you click Dynamic, on a power cycle, the controller clears the
current IP configuration and resumes sending BOOTP or DHCP
requests, depending on the controller configuration.

5. Click OK.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Change the Network IP Address with Logix Designer Application

IMPORTANT The steps in Use Logix Designer Application to Set the Controller’s IP Address on
page 85 describe how to assign an IP address for a CompactLogix 5370
controller that does not have a valid IP address.
The steps in this section describe how to change the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller that already has a valid IP address assigned to it.

You can change a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s IP address via Logix Designer
application over a USB or EtherNet/IP network connection.

The graphics in this section show how to change the IP address for a
1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller over a USB connection. The same steps apply
to other CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Verify that your computer is connected to the controller.

2. Verify that your project is online.
3. Right-click the controller name and choose Properties.

You could also right-click the Ethernet node in the I/O Configuration
section and choose Properties. The Controller Properties dialog box
appears on the Internet Protocol tab.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 91

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

4. Change the controller’s IP address.

5. Make other changes where necessary.

6. Click OK.

Change the Network IP Address with an SD Card

You can use an SD card to change the IP address for a CompactLogix 5370
controller when controller power is cycled. Using the SD card to change the IP
address eliminates the need for software to complete this task.

IMPORTANT Setting the IP address from an SD card does not require software during the
power-up process. However, you must have previously saved the project to the
SD card.

These requirements apply when using the SD card to change the IP address on a
CompactLogix 5370 controller:

• A project is stored on the SD card.

• The project stored on the SD card includes a different IP address for the
CompactLogix 5370 controller than the IP address currently in use on the
physical controller housing the SD card.

• The project stored on the SD card is configured with the Load Image
parameter set to On Power Up.

• Power is cycled to the controller with the SD card installed.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

92 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Load the Controller Firmware You must download the current firmware before you can use the
CompactLogix 5370 controller.

IMPORTANT Do not interrupt a firmware upgrade while it is in process. Doing so may cause
the CompactLogix 5370 controller’s firmware revision to revert to its
out-of-the-box revision level, that is, 1.xxx.

To load firmware, you can use any of the following:

• ControlFLASH utility that installs with Logix Designer application

• AutoFlash that launches through the application when you download a

project and the controller does not have the matching firmware revision

• SD card (catalog numbers 1784-SD1 or 1784-SD2) with an image already

stored to the card

If you use the ControlFLASH or AutoFlash utilities, you need an EtherNet/IP

network or USB connection to the controller.

IMPORTANT Be aware that the controller firmware revision loaded via the ControlFLASH
utility or the AutoFlash option may be overwritten after future controller
power cycles if the conditions described in Use the Secure Digital Card to Load
Firmware on page 102 exist.

The firmware is available with the application or you can download it from the
support website. Go to http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support.

Complete these steps to download firmware from the support website.

1. On the Rockwell Automation Support Page, click Software Updates,

Firmware and Other Downloads under the Other Tools heading.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 93

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

2. Click Firmware Updates.

3. Click Control Hardware.

4. Select the desired firmware revision.

5. Download the firmware zip file.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Use the ControlFLASH Utility to Load Firmware

You can use the ControlFLASH utility to load firmware through a USB or
EtherNet/IP network connection. We recommend the following when you load
firmware via the ControlFLASH utility:
• Use a USB connection to load the firmware.
• Remove the SD card, if one is installed in the controller.

Complete these steps to use the ControlFLASH utility to load firmware.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps apply to other
CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Verify that a connection exists between your computer and the

CompactLogix 5370 controller.
2. Choose Start>Programs>FLASH Programming Tools>ControlFLASH.

3. When the Welcome dialog box appears, click Next.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 95

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

4. Choose the appropriate controller catalog number and click Next.

5. Expand the network until you see the controller.

6. Choose the controller at the first instance in which it appears, as shown
below, and click OK.

IMPORTANT If you expand the controller, that is, expand the network beyond the
first instance in which it appears on the left side of the screen, you may
experience issue when performing the firmware update.

96 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

7. Choose the revision level to which you want to update the controller and
click Next.

8. To start the update of the controller, click Finish and then click Yes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 97

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Before the firmware upgrade begins, you see the following dialog box. Take
the appropriate action for your application. In this example, the upgrade
continues when OK is clicked.

After the controller is updated, the status dialog box displays the message
Update complete.

9. Click OK.
10. To close the ControlFLASH utility, click Cancel and then click Yes.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Automatic Upgrade for CompactLogix 5370 L1 Embedded I/O Module

IMPORTANT This section applies to CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers only.

After the controller firmware upgrade process is complete, the controller may
execute a firmware upgrade for its embedded I/O module.

Remember these points regarding the automatic firmware upgrade for the
embedded I/O module:

• The firmware upgrade occurs on the embedded I/O module only, not the
local expansion modules.

If you need to update the firmware revision on any 1734 POINT I/O
modules that will be used as local expansion modules, you must do so
before installing them in the CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

• The firmware upgrade on the embedded I/O module occurs automatically.

No user action is required.

• The upgrade process make take up to a few minutes to complete.

• During the firmware upgrade process, the controller’s OK status indicator

remains in a flashing red state.

• Do not cycle power to the controller while the firmware upgrade for
embedded I/O module is taking place.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 99

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Use AutoFlash to Load Firmware

You can use AutoFlash to load firmware through a USB or EtherNet/IP

network connection.

Let the upgrade complete without interruption.If you interrupt a firmware

upgrade that is in process, you are alerted that an error has occurred. In this case,
cycle power to the controller. The firmware revision level reverts to the 1.xxx
revision level and you can begin the upgrade process again.

Complete these steps to use the AutoFlash utility to load firmware.

IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps apply to other
CompactLogix 5370 controllers with slight variations in screens.

1. Make sure the appropriate network connection is made and your network
driver is configured in RSLinx Classic software.
2. Create a controller project.
3. Click RSWho to specify the controller path.

4. Select your controller and click Download.

You may also choose to click Update Firmware to complete this process. If
you do so, skip to step step 6.

A dialog box appears indicating that the project revision and controller
firmware revision are different.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

5. Click Update Firmware.

6. Use the checkbox and pull-down menu to choose your controller and
firmware revision.
7. Click Update.

8. When the Update Firmware dialog box appears, click Yes.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 101

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Before the firmware upgrade begins, you may be warned about your
controller missing its SD card. Take the appropriate action, typically
clicking OK.

The firmware upgrade begins.

9. When the firmware upgrade is complete, the Download dialog box
appears and you may continue by downloading your project to the
controller.

Use the Secure Digital Card to Load Firmware

You can use an installed SD card to load firmware on a CompactLogix 5370

controller. Using the SD card to load firmware eliminates the need for software to
complete this task.

Your application requires the following to load firmware from an SD card at

power-up:

• You must have saved the project to the SD card before the power cycle.

• The firmware revision in the project stored on the SD card is different

from the firmware revision on the CompactLogix 5370 controller.

For more information on using the SD card, see Chapter 12, Use a Secure Digital
Card on page 301.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Select the Controller’s CompactLogix 5370 controllers have slightly different front designs and mode
switch placements.
Operating Mode
WARNING: When you change switch settings while power is on, an electrical
arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations.
Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding.

This graphic shows the mode switch on a CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

RUN
RUN
REM
PROG
REM
PROG

This graphic shows the mode switch on a CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
QBFC1B
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

A1+ A1-
RUN
03 11

04 12 B1+ B1-
RUN
05 13 Z1+ Z1- REM
REM +V +V
06 14
PROG 07 15
OUT
0
OUT
2 PROG
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC V
02 10 + in
3+
CJC I
03 11 - in
3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
05 13 in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 103

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

This graphic shows the mode switch on a CompactLogix 5370 L3 controller.

L33ER
RUN NS

FORCE LINK 1

I/O LINK 2

OK SD

RUN
REM RUN
PROG

REM
PROG

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

Use the controller’s mode switch to set the CompactLogix 5370 controller’s
operating mode.
Mode Switch Description
Position
Run You can perform these tasks:
• Upload projects.
• Run the program and enable outputs.
You cannot perform these tasks:
• Update controller firmware.
• Create or delete tasks, programs, or routines.
• Create or delete tags or edit online.
• Import a program to the controller.
• Change the controller’s port configuration, advanced port configuration, nor network configuration settings.
• Change controller configuration parameters directly set for operation on a device-level ring (DLR) network topology.
Prog You can perform these tasks:
• Update controller firmware.
• Disable outputs.
• Upload/download projects.
• Create, modify, and delete tasks, programs, or routines.
• Change the controller’s port configuration, advanced port configuration, nor network configuration settings.
You cannot perform these tasks:
• Use the controller to execute (scan) tasks.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation Chapter 4

Mode Switch Description

Position
Rem You can perform these tasks:
• Upload/download projects.
• Change the controller’s port configuration, advanced port configuration, nor network configuration settings.
• Change between Remote Program, Remote Test, and Remote Run modes through the application.
Remote Run • The controller executes (scans) tasks.
• Enable outputs.
• Edit online.
Remote Program • Update controller firmware.
• Disable outputs.
• Create, modify, and delete tasks, programs or routines.
• Download projects.
• Edit online.
• The controller does not execute (scan) tasks.
Remote Test • Execute tasks with outputs disabled.
• Edit online.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 105

Chapter 4 Complete Software Tasks Required at CompactLogix 5370 Controller Installation

Notes:

106 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 5

CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Topic Page
CompactLogix 5370 Control System Components 108
Controller Functionality 109
Example System Configurations 111

The CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer state-of-the-art control,

communication, and I/O elements in a distributed control package. This product
family includes these CompactLogix 5370 controllers:
• 1769-L16ER-BB1B
• 1769-L18ER-BB1B
• 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
• 1769-L24ER-QB1B
• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
• 1769-L30ER
• 1769-L30ERM
• 1769-L30ER-NSE
• 1769-L33ER
• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-L36ERM

Among the features the CompactLogix 5370 controllers support are dual
EtherNet/IP ports on each controller and support for Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network on some CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

For a complete description of the CompactLogix 5370 control system

components and functionality, see Table 2 and Table 3, respectively.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 107

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

CompactLogix 5370 Control Table 2 describes components a CompactLogix 5370 controller uses in a typical
control system.
System Components
Table 2 - CompactLogix 5370 Control System Components
System Component Product Family
CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers
Controller One of the controllers documented in this publication
Power supply External power supply connected to the External power supply connected to the One of the following 1769 Compact I/O power
controller’s embedded 24V DC nominal input, controller’s embedded 24V DC Input, isolated supplies:
nonisolated power supply. The power supply power supply • 1769-PA2
has a 10…28.8 input range.
• 1769-PB2
• 1769-PA4
• 1769-PB4
Communication networks Any of the following: Any of the following:
components • EtherNet/IP network via built-in EtherNet/ • EtherNet/IP network via built-in EtherNet/IP network ports
IP network ports • DeviceNet network via a 1769-SDN module
• USB connection for programming and • USB connection for programming and firmware upgrades only
firmware upgrades only
Software • One of the following:
– RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx, - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers using firmware revision 20.xxx
– Logix Designer application, version 21.00.00 or later, - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers using firmware revision 21.000 or later
• RSLinx Classic software, version 2.59.xx or later
• RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet software, version 11.00.00 or later
IMPORTANT: This software is not used with CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers because they do not offer DeviceNet connectivity.
Secure Digital (SD) card for • 1784-SD1 card - Ships with CompactLogix 5370 controller and offers 1 GB of memory
external nonvolatile memory • 1784-SD2 card - Available for separate purchase and offers 2 GB of memory
I/O modules • 16 embedded 24V DC digital input points - • 16 embedded 24V DC digital input points • Local expansion modules- 1769 Compact
The nominal input voltage is 24V DC but the • 16 embedded 24V DC digital output points I/O modules
operating range is 10…28.8V DC. • Distributed I/O - Multiple I/O module
• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
• 16 embedded 24V DC digital output points - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers only product lines over DeviceNet and
The nominal input voltage is 24V DC but the – Four embedded high-speed counters EtherNet/IP networks
operating range is 10…28.8V DC. – Four embedded universal analog input
• Local expansion modules- 1734 POINT I/O points
modules – Two embedded analog output points
• Distributed I/O - Multiple I/O module • Local expansion modules- 1769 Compact
product lines over an EtherNet/IP network I/O modules
• Distributed I/O - Multiple I/O module
product lines over DeviceNet and
EtherNet/IP networks
Reset button If held in during controller powerup, it will clear the user program from the controller’s internal memory.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

Controller Functionality Table 3 describes functionality available with CompactLogix 5370 controllers.
Table 3 - CompactLogix 5370 Controller Functionality
Cat. No. Controller Tasks Programs Internal Energy EtherNet/IP Power Supply On-board User Local I/O Module
Supported Supported Per Storage Solution Network Distance Rating Memory Size Support
Task Topology
Support
1769-L16ER-BB1B As many as six
384 KB 1734 POINT I/O
modules(2)
NA
1769-L18ER-BB1B As many as eight
512 KB 1734 POINT I/O
1769-L18ERM-BB1B modules(2)
1769-L24ER-QB1B
Support the 768 KB As many as four
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B following See footnote Compact I/O
topologies: below(1) modules
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Yes - Eliminating 1 MB
32 100 the need for a • Device-level
1769-L30ER battery ring (DLR)
As many as eight
1769-L30ER-NSE • Linear 1 MB Compact I/O
• Traditional star modules
1769-L30ERM
1769-L33ER 4 As many as 16
2 MB Compact I/O
1769-L33ERM modules
1769-L36ERM As many as 30
3 MB Compact I/O
modules
(1) CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers have an embedded power supply. Therefore, you do not need to consider power supply distance rating when installing the controller. The Compact I/O modules used
as local expansion modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems operate on a CompactBus and do have a power supply distance rating you must consider when installing those modules.
For more information on power supply distance rating with respect to using Compact I/O modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, see page 134 and page 216.

(2) IMPORTANT: You can use up to the maximum number of 1734 POINT I/O modules with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers listed in Table 1, as long as the total current drawn by the modules does not
exceed the available POINTBus backplane current of 1 A. If you need to use more local expansion modules than the POINTBus backplane current supports, you can install a 1734-EP24DC POINT I/O
expansion power supply between local expansion modules to increase the POINTBus backplane power and meet your system requirements.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 109

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Additionally, you can use the 1769-L30ER-NSE controller only in applications

that require the installed controller deplete its residual stored energy to specific
levels before transporting it into or out of your application.

WARNING: If your application requires the 1769-L30ER-NSE controller to deplete its

residual stored energy to 40 μJ or fewer before you transport it into or out of the
application, complete these steps before you remove the controller.

1.Turn off power to the chassis.

After you turn off power, the controller’s OK status indicator transitions from Green to
Solid Red to OFF.

2.Wait at least 15 minutes for the residual stored energy to decrease to 40 μJ or

fewer before you remove the controller.

There is no visual indication of when the 15 minutes has expired. You must track that
time period.

Some applications that require the installed controller deplete its residual stored
energy to specific levels before transporting it into or out of your application.
This may include other devices that also require a wait time before removing
them. See those products’ documentation for more information.

Support for Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network

The following CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over

an EtherNet/IP network:
• 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
• 1769-L30ERM
• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-L36ERM

For more information on using CompactLogix 5370 controllers in applications

that require Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see Chapter 11,
Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications on
page 289.

110 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

Example System CompactLogix 5370 controllers support the following networks:

Configurations • EtherNet/IP network - All CompactLogix 5370 controllers
• DeviceNet network - CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers only

EtherNet/IP Network

IMPORTANT Figure 4 and figure 2 show CompactLogix 5370 controllers used in a DLR
network topology on an EtherNet/IP network. You can also use
CompactLogix 5370 controllers in linear or star EtherNet/IP network
topologies.
For more information on the other EtherNet/IP network topologies, see
Communicate over Networks on page 115.
Some of the CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network, if desired. For more information on using Integrated
Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see Chapter 11, Develop Integrated
Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications on page 289.

Figure 2 shows an example EtherNet/IP system configuration for a

1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller.

Figure 2 - Example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Configuration on an EtherNet/IP Network

Computer Connected via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a PanelView Plus Terminal Connected

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter 1794-AENTR FLEX™ I/O Adapter
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules with FLEX I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 111

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Figure 2 shows an example EtherNet/IP system configuration for a

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 3 - Example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Configuration on an

EtherNet/IP Network

Computer Connected via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1
QBFC1B

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a PanelView Plus Terminal Connected

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a 1734-AENTR POINT I/O™ Adapter 1794-AENTR FLEX I/O Adapter with
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules FLEX I/O Modules

Figure 4 shows an example EtherNet/IP system configuration for a

1769-L33ERM controller.

Figure 4 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Configuration on an EtherNet/IP Network

Computer Connected via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1769-L33ERM Control System

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a PanelView™ Plus Terminal Connected

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

Kinetix 6500 Drives 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter 1794-AENT FLEX I/O Adapter Connected Via
with Motors with POINT I/O Modules a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

112 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview Chapter 5

DeviceNet Network

IMPORTANT CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers can send messages to devices on the
DeviceNet network; however, these controllers cannot receive messages
from those devices on the DeviceNet network.

Figure 6 shows an example DeviceNet system configuration for a CompactLogix

1769-L24ER-QB1B controller.

Figure 5 - Example 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System Configuration on a DeviceNet Network

Computer with DeviceNet Connection 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System with 1769-SDN Scanner Module
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QB1B

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

1606-XLDNET DeviceNet E3 Overload Relay 1734-ADN POINT I/O Adapter

Power Supply with POINT I/O Modules

Figure 6 shows an example DeviceNet system configuration for a CompactLogix

1769-L33ERM controller.

Figure 6 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Configuration on a DeviceNet Network

Computer with DeviceNet Connection 1769-L33ERM Control System with 1769-SDN Scanner Module

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

1606-XLDNET DeviceNet E3 Overload Relay 1734-ADN POINT I/O Adapter

Power Supply with POINT I/O Modules

For more information on using the CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controllers on

DeviceNet networks, see Communicate over Networks on page 115.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 113

Chapter 5 CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Overview

Notes:

114 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 6

Communicate over Networks

Topic Page
EtherNet/IP Network Communication 116
DeviceNet Network Communication 131

All CompactLogix 5370 controllers support these tasks over an

EtherNet/IP network:
• Control distributed I/O
• Send/receive messages to/from other devices on the same network or
another network
• Produce/consume (interlock) data between controllers
• Socket interface

CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers support these tasks over a

DeviceNet network:
• Control distributed I/O
• Send messages to devices on the same network; the controller cannot
receive messages from other devices on the network.

All CompactLogix 5370 controllers also support temporary connections from

your computer via a USB connection.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 115

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

EtherNet/IP Network The EtherNet/IP network offers a full suite of control, configuration and data
collection services by layering the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) over the
Communication standard Internet protocols, such as TCP/IP and UDP. This combination of
well-accepted standards provides the capability required to both support
information data exchange and control applications.

In addition to conventional communication over the EtherNet/IP network, the

CompactLogix 5370 controllers use socket interface transactions to
communicate with Ethernet devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP
application protocol.

For more information on socket interface transactions, see Socket Interface with
CompactLogix 5370 Controllers on page 126.

Available Software
You use the software listed in the following table with a CompactLogix 5370
controller on an EtherNet/IP network.
Software Required Version Functions Required
RSLogix 5000 Version 20.xx.xx - For CompactLogix • Configure the CompactLogix
5370 controllers using firmware project.
revision 20.xxx. • Define EtherNet/IP communication.
Studio 5000 Version 21.00.00 or later - For • Change IP address for devices on
environment CompactLogix 5370 controllers using network, including the
firmware revision 21.000 or later. CompactLogix 5370 controller.
Yes
RSLinx Classic Version 2.59 or later • Assign or change IP addresses to
devices on an EtherNet/IP network.
• Configure communication devices.
• Provide diagnostics.
• Establish communication between
devices.
BOOTP/DHCP Most current version is installed with Assign IP addresses to devices on an No
utility RSLinx Classic software installation EtherNet/IP network.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

EtherNet/IP Network Functionality on

CompactLogix 5370 Controllers
The CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer this EtherNet/IP
network functionality:

• Dual built-in EtherNet/IP network ports

• Support for the following EtherNet/IP network topologies:

– Device-level Ring Network Topology
– Linear Network Topology
– Star Network Topology

• Support for CIP Sync technology

• Support for Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network - Only the

following controllers support this functionality:
– 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
– 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
– 1769-L30ERM
– 1769-L33ERM
– 1769-L36ERM

• Socket interface to communicate with Ethernet devices that do not

support the EtherNet/IP application protocol

• Duplicate IP address detection

• Unicast and multicast communication

• Support messaging, produced/consumed tags, HMI, and distributed I/O

• Interface via RJ45, twisted-pair cables

• Support half/full-duplex 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps operation

• Support standard switches

• No network scheduling required

• No routing tables required

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 117

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network

When configuring your CompactLogix 5370 control system, you must account
for the number of Ethernet nodes you include in the I/O configuration section of
your project. CompactLogix 5370 controllers have limits on the number of nodes
they support in the I/O configuration section.

Table 4 lists the Ethernet node limits for CompactLogix controllers.

Table 4 - CompactLogix 5370 Controller Ethernet Node Guidelines
Cat. No. Ethernet Nodes Supported
1769-L16ER-BB1B 4
1769-L18ER-BB1B
8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B
1769-L24ER-QB1B
8
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 16
1769-L30ER
1769-L30ERM 16
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER
32
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 48

IMPORTANT While CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer the option of using Ethernet node
count to effectively and efficiently design a control system, the controllers do
have connection limits on an EtherNet/IP network.
For more information on how to design EtherNet/IP network use in your
CompactLogix 5370 control system, see these resources:
• The EtherNet/IP Capacity Tool available at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/solutions/integratedarchitecture/
resources3.html#enetpredict.
The EtherNet/IP Capacity Tool helps you in the initial layout of your
EtherNet/IP network.

• Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication

ENET-RM002
• Appendix B, Connections over an EtherNet/IP Network on page 313.

118 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Devices Included in the Node Count

Any devices you add directly to the local Ethernet I/O configuration are counted
toward the controller’s node limitation. The following are example devices that
are added to the I/O configuration section in your project and must be counted:
• Remote communication adapters
• I/O modules directly connected to the EtherNet/IP network, for example
the 1732E-IB16M12R ArmorBlock® EtherNet/IP module
• Motion devices, such as drives
• Remote controllers
• HMI devices that are included in the I/O configuration section, for
example, PanelView Plus terminals
• Linking devices, such as the 1788-EN2DN, Ethernet-to-DeviceNet
linking device
• Third-party devices that are directed connected to the
EtherNet/IP network

Devices Excluded from the Node Count

When considering a CompactLogix 5370 controller’s Ethernet node limitation,

you do not count Ethernet devices that exist on the EtherNet/IP network but are
not added to the I/O configuration section of the project.

The following devices are not added to the I/O configuration section in your
project and are not counted among the total number of nodes:

• Computer

• HMI that are not added to the I/O configuration section, for example,
PanelView Plus terminals

• MSG instructions

• Devices the CompactLogix 5370 controllers use a socket interface to

communicate with.

For example, the following devices require communication via a socket

interface:
– Modbus TCP/IP device
– Bar code scanners

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 119

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

EtherNet/IP Network Topologies

CompactLogix 5370 controllers support these EtherNet/IP network types:

• Device-level Ring Network Topology

• Linear Network Topology

• Star Network Topology

Each of these EtherNet/IP network topologies support applications that use

Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, if required.

Device-level Ring Network Topology

A DLR network topology is a single-fault tolerant ring network intended for the
interconnection of automation devices. A DLR network is comprised of
Supervisor (Active and Backup) nodes and Ring nodes.

DLR network topologies automatically convert to linear network topologies

when a fault is detected. The conversion to the new network topology maintains
communication of data on the network. The fault condition is typically easily
detected and corrected.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers connect directly to a DLR network topology,

that is, without requiring a 1783-ETAP tap to connect to the network. The
controllers can function in any of the roles on a DLR network topology, that is,
active supervisor node, backup supervisor node or ring node.

T
IMPORTANT The topology graphics shown in this section are examples of applications that
use DLR network topologies only.
We recommend you exercise caution if you consider designing an application
that includes connecting a DLR topology with a linear or star network topology.

For more information on using a DLR network topology, see the EtherNet/IP
Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, publication ENET-AP005.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Figure 7 shows an example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system using a DLR

network topology.

Figure 7 - Example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Using DLR Network Topology

Computer Connected via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a PanelView Plus Terminal Connected

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter 1794-AENTR FLEX I/O Adapter with
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules FLEX I/O Modules

Figure 8 shows an example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system using a

DLR network topology.

Figure 8 - Example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Using DLR Network Topology

Computer Connected via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
QBFC1B
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a PanelView Plus Terminal Connected

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter 1794-AENTR FLEX I/O Adapter with
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules FLEX I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 121

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Figure 9 shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system using a DLR

network topology.

Figure 9 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a DLR Network Topology

Computer Connected via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1769-L33ERM Control System

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Kinetix 350 Drive Connected Via a PanelView Plus Terminal Connected

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power

IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

Kinetix 6500 Drives 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter 1794-AENT FLEX I/O Adapter Connected Via
with Motors with POINT I/O Modules a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

122 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Linear Network Topology

A linear network topology is a collection of devices that are daisy-chained

together across an EtherNet/IP network. Devices capable of connecting to a
linear network topology use embedded switch technology to eliminate any need
for a separate switch, as required in Star network topologies.

Figure 10 shows an example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system using a linear

network topology.

Figure 10 - Example 1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Using a Linear Network Topology

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O Adapter 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter

with FLEX I/O Modules with POINT I/O Modules

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status

PanelView Plus Terminal

Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power

IP ADDRESS
Computer with Ethernet Port
Link 2
Activity/
Status

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via
Control System a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

Figure 11 shows an example 1769-L24ER-QB1B control system using a linear

network topology.

Figure 11 - Example 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System Using a Linear Network Topology

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O Adapter 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter

with FLEX I/O Modules with POINT I/O Modules

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status

PanelView Plus Terminal

Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Computer with Ethernet Port

Link 2
Activity/
Status

L24ER LINK 1 LINK 2

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE
24VDC

QB1B
SINK\

INPUT
DC

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

1769-L24ER-QB1B 1732E-IB16M12R ArmorBlock Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via

Control System EtherNet/IP Module a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 123

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Figure 12 shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system using a linear

network topology.

Figure 12 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a Linear Network Topology

1794-AENT FLEX I/O Adapter Connected 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter

Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules
002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power

PanelView Plus Terminal

IP ADDRESS
Computer Link 2
Activity/
Status

with Ethernet Port

1769-L33ERM Control System

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

PowerFlex 755 Drive Connected via a

1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap
Kinetix 6500 Drives and Motors

Star Network Topology

A star network topology is a traditional EtherNet/IP network that includes

multiple devices connected to each other via an Ethernet switch.

Figure 13 show a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system using a star topology.

Figure 13 - Example1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System Using a Star Network Topology

Computer 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
Control System

Stratix 6000™ Switch PanelView Plus Terminal with

1732E-IB16M12R LINK 1 LINK 2

8 7 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port

ArmorBlock 6 5

EtherNet/IP Module 4 3
2 1

Kinetix 350 Drive 1734-AENT POINT I/O Adapter

with POINT I/O Modules

124 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Figure 14 show a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system using a star topology.

Figure 14 - Example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Using a Star Network Topology

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE
QBFC1B

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN

Computer
HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V

Control System
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Stratix 6000 Switch PanelView Plus Terminal with

8 7
6 5
Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
Kinetix 350 Drive
4 3
2 1

Kinetix 350 Drive 1734-AENT POINT I/O Adapter

with POINT I/O Modules

Figure 15 shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system using a star topology.

Figure 15 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a Star Network Topology

Computer 1769-L33ERM
Control System
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Stratix 6000 Switch PanelView Plus Terminal with

Kinetix 6500 Drives 8 7
6 5 Built-in EtherNet/IP Port
and Motors
4 3
2 1

1734-AENT POINT I/O Adapter

Kinetix 350 Drive with POINT I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 125

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Socket Interface with CompactLogix 5370 Controllers

The CompactLogix 5370 controller can use socket interfaces to communicate

with Ethernet devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP application protocol.

Examples of devices that do not support the EtherNet/IP application protocol

but might be used in a CompactLogix 5370 controller application include the
following:
• Modbus TCP/IP device
• Bar code scanners
• RFID readers

The socket interface is implemented via the Socket Object. CompactLogix 5370
controllers communicate with the Socket Object via MSG instructions. All
CompactLogix 5370 controllers must use unconnected MSG instructions with
socket interfaces.

The Socket Object services lets the controller perform these actions:
• Open connections
• Accept incoming connections
• Send data
• Receive data

To communicate with another device, you must understand the other device’s
application protocol. The CompactLogix 5370 controller has no application
protocol knowledge. The controller makes the socket services available to its
program.

Number and Type of Sockets

The CompactLogix 5370 controllers support up to 32 socket instances. Each

instance can be one of these types:

• UDP socket - Sends and receives UDP datagrams.

• TCP client socket - The Logix5000 program initiates the connection.

• TCP server socket - Another device initiates the connection to the

Logix5000 program.

• TCP listen socket - Listens on a specified port number for incoming

connections.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

The options available for UDP and TCP send and receive services are described
in this table.
Type Communication Send (Write) Receive (Read)
UDP Unicast Yes Yes
Multicast Yes Yes
Broadcast Yes Yes
TCP Unicast Yes Yes
Multicast N/A N/A
Broadcast N/A N/A

You must have a listen socket for each TCP port number that accepts
connections. Multiple TCP server sockets can share a listen socket if the
connections are made to the same port number.

You can partition the available socket instances between UDP and TCP sockets
in these ways:
• Use all instances for client TCP connections.
• Use one instance to listen for incoming TCP connections and then accept
the remaining connections from other devices.
• Perform both TCP client and server operations.
• Perform both TCP and UDP operations.

These socket services are available.

Socket Service Socket Instance
SocketCreate Server or client
OpenConnection Client
AcceptConnection • If you issue an AcceptConnection service, the instance is listen type.
• If the AcceptConnection service returns an instance as a result of an
incoming connection request, the socket instance is server type
ReadSocket
WriteSocket
DeleteSocket
DeleteAllSockets Server or client
ClearLog
JoinMulticastAddress
DropMulticastAddress

Once you open a connection on a client socket instance, you cannot use the same
socket instance to accept incoming connections. Similarly, if you accept
connections on a socket instance, you cannot then use the instance to open
outgoing connections. This behavior is consistent with standard socket API
behavior.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 127

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Message Instructions to Use Socket Services

IMPORTANT This section describes only one of the socket service available with your
CompactLogix 5370 controller.
For more information on all socket services, see the EtherNet/IP Socket
Interface Application Technique, publication ENET-AT002.

In the CompactLogix 5370 controller program, use a CIP Generic MSG

instruction to request socket services.

The following example graphics show the Configuration and Communication

tabs for a MSG instruction that uses the OpenConnection service type. The
parameter values for this MSG type are defined Table 5.

IMPORTANT Before you can configure the MSG instruction, you must create a user-defined
data type (UDT) that is available in the Source Element parameter. See MSG
Source Element for more information on how to create a UDT.

IMPORTANT: Keep the following in mind when using sockets with

CompactLogix 5370 controllers:
• A significant difference between CompactLogix 5370 controllers and
other Logix5000 controllers is the communication path.
CompactLogix 5370 controllers do not require a separate EtherNet/IP
network communication module, for example, a 1756-EN2T module.
In the case of the CompactLogix 5370 controllers, the MSG is sent to
the controller itself using the path ‘1,0’.

• All CompactLogix 5370 controllers must use unconnected MSG

instructions for socket servers. When you configure a message for a
CompactLogix 5370 controller, make sure the Connected checkbox on
the Message Configuration dialog box is cleared.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Table 5 - Parameter Values for OpenConnection Service

Configuration Parameter Description
MSG Type CIP Generic
Service Type OpenConnection
Service Code 4c
Class 342
Instance from CreateSocket
Attribute 0
Source Element Application specific
Source Length

MSG Source Element

You must also create a user-defined data type (UDT) to use this service. This
example graphic shows the UDT screen. The parameter values for this MSG type
are defined in Table 6 on page 130.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 129

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Table 6 - Parameter Values for OpenConnection Service

Configuration Parameter Element Description
Timeout DINT Specify the timeout in milliseconds.
DestAddr STRING Specify an array of characters (maximum of 64) to define
the destination of the connection. Specify either of these:
• Hostname?port=xxx
• IPAddr?port=xxx
For example, to specify an IP address, enter
10.88.81.10?port=2813
.LEN DINT The length of the destination address.
.DATA SINT array The array containing the destination address.

For more information on socket interface, see the following:

• EtherNet/IP Socket Interface Application Technique,

publication ENET-AT002

• Rockwell Automation Sample Code Library at http://

samplecode.rockwellautomation.com/

Quality of Service (QoS) and I/O Module Connections

CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Quality of Service (QoS) technology.

QoS lets the controller prioritize EtherNet/IP network traffic. By default, the
CompactLogix 5370 controllers are QoS-enabled.

Some EtherNet/IP devices do not support QoS technology unless the device’s
firmware is upgraded to a required minimum firmware revision level. For
example, the ControlLogix® 1756-ENBT communication module must use
firmware revision 4.005 or later to support QoS technology.

To make sure communication between CompactLogix 5370 controllers and I/O

modules are maintained, verify that the EtherNet/IP devices use the products’
minimum firmware revision level required to support QoS technology.

For more information on EtherNet/IP devices’ minimum firmware revision levels

to support QoS technology, see Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase Tech
Note 66325. The document is available at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase/.

130 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

DeviceNet Network The CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 controllers communicate with other devices
over the DeviceNet network via a Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner
Communication module. The DeviceNet network uses the Common Industrial Protocol (CIP) to
provide the control, configuration, and data collection capabilities for industrial
devices.

IMPORTANT This section applies to applications using CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3

controllers only.
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers do not operate on DeviceNet networks.

Available Software

The software applications listed in this table are required when using a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller on a DeviceNet network.
Software Required Version Functions
RSLogix 5000 20.xx.xx - For CompactLogix 5370 controllers
using firmware revision 20.xxx.
Studio 5000 21.00.00 or later - For CompactLogix 5370 Configure the CompactLogix project
environment controllers using firmware revision 21.000 or
later.
RSLinx Classic 2.59.00 or later(1), (2) • Configure communication devices
• Provide diagnostics
• Establish communication between devices
RSNetWorx for One of the following: • Configure DeviceNet devices
DeviceNet • 11.00.00 or later if used with RSLogix • Define the scanlist for the
5000 software, version 20.xx.xx DeviceNet network
• 21.00.00 or later if used with RSLogix
5000 software, version 21.00.00 or later
(1) CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers require RSLinx Classic software, version 2.59.01 or later.

(2) We recommend that you use RSLinx Classic software, version 3.51.00 or later, with Studio 5000 environment, version 21.00.00
or later.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 131

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Figure 16 shows an example 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system using a

DeviceNet network.

Figure 16 - Example 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System Using a DeviceNet Network

Computer with DeviceNet Connection 1769-L24ER-QB1B Control System with 1769-SDN Scanner Module
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QB1B

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

1606-XLDNET DeviceNet E3 Overload Relay 1734-ADN POINT I/O Adapter

Power Supply with POINT I/O Modules

Figure 17 shows an example 1769-L33ERM using a DeviceNet network.

Figure 17 - Example 1769-L33ERM Control System Using a DeviceNet Network

Computer 1769-L33ERM Control System with 1769-SDN Scanner Module

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

1606-XLDNET DeviceNet Power Supply E3 Overload Relay 1734-ADN POINT I/O DeviceNet
Adapter with POINT I/O Modules

132 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet Scanner Module

You connect a CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller to a DeviceNet network

via a Compact I/O 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner module.

Before installing the scanner module, consider the following:

• You can connect the scanner module to an adjacent controller, power

supply, or I/O module.

• You must account for these two requirements jointly:

– Power Supply Distance Rating - Described on page 134
– Current Capacity in CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems -
Described on page 138

• The scanner module, as a master, can own up to 63 slave I/O nodes.

• The scanner module can simultaneously be a master and be a slave owned

by another DeviceNet master.

The scanner module has this functionality:

• Supports messaging to devices, not controller to controller

• Supports control-level network to device-level network for programming,

configuration, control or data collection

• Supports back up your CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller on the

DeviceNet network

For more information on using the 1769-SDN to back up your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 or L3 controller, see the 1769-SDN DeviceNet
Scanner Module User Manual, publication 1769-UM009.

• Shares a common application layer with EtherNet/IP networks

• Offers diagnostics for improved data collection and fault detection

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 133

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L2 and L3 control systems allow you to install 1769-SDN

scanner modules as local expansion modules. The 1769-SDN scanner module
has a power supply distance rating that you must consider before install it.

Power supply distance rating is the number of slots a 1769-SDN scanner module
can be installed away from the power supply. The 1769-SDN scanner module has
a power supply distance rating of four. Therefore, your CompactLogix 5370 L2
or L3 control system can include up to three modules between the 1769-SDN
scanner module and the power supply.

Using the 1769-SDN scanner module’s power supply distance rating as a design
consideration differs by CompactLogix L2 controller catalog number.

CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems

In a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, you can install a 1769-SDN scanner

module on the right side of the control system. The controller has an embedded
power supply preventing the installation of 1769-SDN scanner modules between
the controller and the power supply.

Additionally, the controller has embedded I/O modules that prevent installation
of the 1769-SDN scanner module directly to the right of the embedded power
supply. CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems have one or two embedded I/O
modules as described below:

• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller - One embedded I/O module

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers - Two

embedded I/O modules

While the embedded I/O modules are not considered local expansion modules,
you still must include each embedded I/O module in the module slot count when
determining where to install the 1769-SDN scanner module as a local expansion
module.

134 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

The farthest local expansion module slot where you can install the 1769-SDN
scanner module in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system is module slot
number two or three as determined by the controller catalog number used in the
control system.

Table 7 describes the farthest local expansion module slot where you can install a
1769-SDN scanner module and meet its power supply distance rating
requirement.
Table 7 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-SDN Scanner Module
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-SDN Scanner Module Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QB1B 1 The embedded I/O module is the first module in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating, the
1769-SDN scanner module can be installed in slot 3 of the local expansion modules, as shown below.

L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
QB1B

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-SDN scanner module.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install up to two local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-SDN scanner module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 135

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Table 7 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-SDN Scanner Module
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-SDN Scanner Module Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B 2 The embedded I/O modules are the first two modules in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B the 1769-SDN scanner module can be installed in slot 2 of the local expansion modules, as shown below.

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
QBFC1B A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-SDN scanner module.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install one local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-SDN scanner module.

IMPORTANT When counting I/O modules to determine the 1769-SDN scanner module
placement in a 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B or 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control system,
the embedded I/O module appearance is different between the physical
appearance and the modules’ appearance the application.
The physical appearance is shown above. The second module is two rows of
termination points below a single set of status indicators.
In the application, the second embedded I/O module appears as two modules
in the Controller Organizer each with their own slot number, that is [2] and [3].
When the 1769-SDN scanner module is installed in the farthest local expansion
module slot possible, that is the fourth module in the control system, it
appears with a [5] designation in the Controller Organizer, as shown below.

Modules [2] and [3] are

shown separately but are
considered a single
module when counting
modules to meet power
supply distance rating
requirements.

1769-SDN scanner module is shown as module [5] in this location but considered the fourth
module when counting modules to meet power supply distance rating requirements.

136 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Communicate over Networks Chapter 6

CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems do not have embedded I/O modules.

You begin counting local expansion slots with the first Compact I/O module
installed next to the power supply when determining where to install a
1769-SDN scanner and meet its power supply distance rating.

In CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, you can install 1769-SDN scanner

modules to the left or right side of the power supply. You can also use both local
and additional banks in a CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, with each
allowing the inclusion of a 1769-SDN scanner module.

In the local bank, the controller must be the leftmost device in the system and
you can only install up to three modules between the controller and the power
supply. Therefore, any 1769-SDN scanner modules that are installed to the left of
the power supply in the local bank, are in a module slot that meets the module’s
power supply distance rating requirements.

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems also support the use of additional banks
for the system’s local expansion modules. Every additional bank requires a 1769
Compact I/O power supply. The bank can be designed with local expansion
modules on either side of the power supply.

In this case, you must install the 1769-SDN scanner module with no more three
Compact I/O modules between the scanner module and the power, regardless of
whether the modules are installed to the left or right of the power supply.

This graphic shows 1769-SDN scanner modules installed in a 1769-L36ERM

control system and meeting the module’s power supply distance rating.

Local Bank

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

1769-SDN Scanner Modules Installed in a 1769-L36ERM Control System

Meeting the Scanner Module’s Power Supply Distance Rating Requirements

Additional Bank

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 137

Chapter 6 Communicate over Networks

Current Capacity in CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

In a local or additional bank, the modules installed on either side of the power
supply cannot draw more current than the power supply can supply. This
requirement partially dictates module placement on the bank.

For example, if a bank uses a 1769-PA2 Compact I/O power supply, each side of
the bank has a current capacity of 1A at 5 V DC and 0.4A at 24 V DC. Because a
1769-SDN scanner module has a current draw of 440 mA at 5 V DC and 0 mA
at 24 V DC, you can only install up to two scanner modules on each side of the
power supply in the bank in this case.

For more information on 1769 Compact I/O power supply maximum current
capacity and calculations you can use to design the modules used in local or
additional banks, see Calculate System Power Consumption on page 244.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 7

Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370

L1 Controllers

This chapter explains how to use I/O modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L1

control system.

Topic Page
Select I/O Modules 139
Validate I/O Layout 156
Use the Event Task 161
Configure I/O 165
Electronic Keying 167
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 173
Monitor I/O Modules 176

Select I/O Modules CompactLogix 5370 L1 control systems offer these I/O module options:
• Embedded I/O Modules
• Local Expansion Modules
• Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 139

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Connect Power to I/O Devices Connected to a CompactLogix 5730 L1

Control System
Section Connect Power to the Controller on page 26 describes how to connect a
dedicated, Class 2/SELV-listed external 24V DC power source to the VDC+ and
VDC- terminals on the removable connector shown below. Those connections
provide power to only the system-side of the embedded I/O and local expansion
I/O modules.

You must connect a separate external power source to the FP+ and FP- terminals
on the controller’s removable connector to power the field-side circuitry of the
embedded I/O modules and the local expansion modules.

That is, power connections to the FP+ and FP- terminals provides power to input
and output devices connected to the controller’s embedded I/O modules or local
expansion modules. For example, input or output devices, such as a bar code
scanner.

The controller’s embedded I/O and local expansion modules’ field-side power is
24V DC nominally with an input range of 10…28.8V DC.

The following graphic shows the removable connector.

IMPORTANT The CG terminal on the removable connector connects to the DIN rail via a
grounding clip on the back of the controller. The controller is grounded once it
is installed on a DIN rail as described in Mount the System on page 22.

You should not make any connections to the CG terminal.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Consider these points before completing the steps in this section:

• This section describes how to connect a 24V DC power source to power

input or output devices connected to the CompactLogix 5370 L1
controller’s embedded I/O or local expansion modules via FP+ and FP-
terminals.

For information on how to connect 24V DC power to the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and the POINTBus backplane via
VDC+ and VDC- terminals on the removable connector, see page 26.

• The external 24V DC power source that is connected to the FP+ and FP-
terminals must be separate from the power source dedicated to powering
the controller via the VDC+ and VDC- terminals.

• You can use the external 24V DC power source that provides power to the
FP+ and FP- terminals to power other components or devices in the
application.

• The external 24V DC power source that provides power to the FP+ and
FP- terminals can be installed on the same DIN rail as the external 24V
DC power source that provides power to the VDC+ and VDC- terminals
or you can install the external 24V DC power sources on separate
DIN rails.

• Use a power source that most effectively meets your application needs.
That is, calculate your application’s power requirements before choosing a
power source to avoid using a power source that far exceeds your
application requirements.

• This section assumes that any DIN rail you use has been grounded
following Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines,
publication 1770-4.1

• For example purposes, this section describes how to use a 1606-XLE80E,

Class 2 switched-mode power supply with the FP+ and FP- terminals. The
exact steps for other external power supplies might vary from those
described here.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 141

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Complete these steps to connect power to the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

1. Verify that the separate external 24V DC power source powering the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller is not powered.
2. Verify that the external 24V DC power source that will be connected to
the FP+ and FP- terminals is not powered.
3. Mount the external power supply that will connect to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on a DIN rail.

The external power supply can be installed on the same DIN rail as the
controller or a separate DIN rail.

4. Connect wires to the appropriate + and - connections on the external

24V DC power source.

WARNING: If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field-side power is on,
an electrical arc can occur. This could cause an explosion in hazardous location
installations. Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before
proceeding.

5. Pull the removable connector off of the CompactLogix 5370 L1

controller.
Wires connected between external 24V DC
power source and VDC+ and VDC-
terminals on the removable connector.

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

142 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

6. Connect the wire connected to the + terminal on the external 24V DC

power source to the FP+ terminal, that is, the fourth terminal from the
top, on the removable connector.

7. Connect the wire connected to the - terminal on the external 24V DC

power source to the FP- terminal, that is the fifth terminal from the top, on
the removable connector.

8. Plug the removable connector into the controller.

9. Secure the removable connector in place.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 143

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

10. Turn power on to the separate external 24V DC power source connected
to the removable connector’s VDC+ and VDC- terminals.
11. Turn power on to the external 24V DC power source connected to the
removable connector’s FP+ and FP- terminals.

The following graphic shows separate external 24V DC power supplies

connected to the VDC+/VDC- and FP+/FP- terminals on the removable
connector, respectively.

IMPORTANT We recommend that you put a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent

protection of 4…6 A @ 52.5…68.25 A2t in line between the incoming power
and the FP+ terminal.

DC ok
DC 24-28V 50W max.
DC
ok
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6

24-
28V

NEC Class 2
Power Supply

IMPORTANT: No wires are

Fuse connected to the CG terminal.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Embedded I/O Modules

In addition to the embedded power supply, CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers

provide an embedded I/O module with these points:
• Sixteen sinking 24V DC digital input points
• Sixteen sourcing 24V DC digital output points

The following diagram shows the wiring terminals on the embedded

I/O module.

DC DC
INPUT OUTPUT

IP Address:
ENET Address: 00:00:BC:66:0F:C7

24 VDC 24 VDC
SINK SOURCE

Consider the following when connecting input or output devices to your

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller’s embedded I/O modules:

• You must connect an external 24V DC power source to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on the controller’s removable connector to power input and
output devices connected to the controller’s embedded I/O modules.

The controller’s embedded I/O modules’ field-side power is 24V DC

nominally with an input range of 10…28.8V DC.

For more information on how to connect an external power source to the

FP+ and FP- terminals, see page 140.

• The I/O points’ available RPI range is 1.0 ms…750.0 ms and can be
changed by 0.5 ms increments. The default setting is 20 ms.

IMPORTANT • If you attempt to use an RPI value that is not valid, the application
automatically rounds the value down to the closest 0.5 ms
increment when you apply the change.
For example, if you set the RPI = 1.75 ms, when you click Apply or
OK, the value is rounded down to 1.5 ms and then applied.
• The RPI value for embedded I/O module is intended to establish a
specific time interval at which data is transmitted. However, the
actual time interval of data transmission may be affected by the
configuration of your CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.
For more information, see Estimate Requested Packet Interval on
page 158.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 145

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Complete these steps to wire the input and output points on the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to push on the spring release clip and insert
the wire.

3. With the wire in place, pull the screwdriver off the spring release clip.
4. Repeat step 2 for all embedded I/O wires needed in your application.

To remove a wire from the removable connector, complete these steps.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to push on the spring release clip and pull the
wire out.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Embedded Input Points

The embedded input points on the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support

2-wire and 3-wire input devices. You can wire the input devices to be powered in
either of the following methods:

• Using an external power supply, as shown in Figure 18 - In this case, you

can monitor the input devices even if field power is interrupted, for
example, by the MCR.

This method is required if you need to continue reading data from the
input devices when the embedded output terminals are disabled, for
example, output power is interrupted by the use of a Master Control Relay
(MCR).

• Using the V terminal on the embedded I/O module, as shown in

Figure 19 - In this case, you cannot monitor the input devices even if field
power is interrupted, for example, by the MCR.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 147

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Figure 18 shows examples of how to power 2-wire and 3-wire input devices in
your application.

IMPORTANT When using Figure 18, use the following guidelines:

• With this wiring configuration, you can monitor the input devices even if
field power is interrupted, for example, by the MCR. The FP- connection
must be maintained as a reference for inputs to function.
• With this wiring configuration, the controller does not protect field-side
devices from overcurrent draw conditions.
We recommend that you put a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent
protection of 4…6 A in line between the incoming power and the FP+
terminal.
• You must use a separate, dedicated Class 2 power supply for the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and a separate power supply for the
embedded I/O module.
• Design your application so that power consumption does not exceed the
power supply ratings.
• The graphic below is a wiring example that complies with the North
American Electrical Code (NEC) standard for isolation between system and
field power.
• The FP+ terminal on the removable connector is the voltage connection.
• The FP- terminal on the removable connector is the common connection.
• The MCR must be closed for the removable connector to provide power to
the embedded I/O module.

Figure 18 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers with Input Devices Powered by External

Power Supplies

DC DC
INPUT OUTPUT

Power
Supply 1

MCR

24 VDC 24 VDC
SINK SOURCE

Power 2-wire Prox 3-wire Prox

Supply 2

148 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Figure 19 shows examples of how to power 2-wire and 3-wire input devices in
your application with connections to a V terminal.

IMPORTANT When using Figure 19, use the following guidelines:

• With this wiring configuration, the input devices lose power if the
removable connector does not power the embedded I/O modules.
• With this wiring configuration, the controller does not protect field-side
devices from overcurrent draw conditions.
We recommend that you put a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent
protection of 4…6 A in line between the incoming power and the FP+
terminal.
• You must use a separate, dedicated Class 2 power supply for the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller and a separate power supply for the
embedded I/O module.
• Design your application so that power consumption does not exceed the
power supply ratings.
• The graphic below is a wiring example that complies with the North
American Electrical Code (NEC) standard for isolation between system and
field power.
• The FP+ terminal on the removable connector is the Voltage connection.
• The FP- terminal on the removable connector is the Common connection.
• The MCR must be closed for the removable connector to provide power to
the embedded I/O module.

Figure 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers with Input Devices Powered by a V Terminal on

Embedded I/O Module

DC DC
INPUT OUTPUT

Power
Supply 1

MCR

24 VDC 24 VDC
SINK SOURCE

Power
2-wire Prox 3-wire Prox
Supply 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 149

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Embedded Output Points

The embedded output points on the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support

2-wire systems. The controller’s embedded power supply powers the embedded
output points over the POINTBus backplane.

The following graphic shows examples of how to connect 2-wire systems to

embedded output points 0…7. The same wiring connections can be used with
output points 8…15.

IMPORTANT Do not exceed the per point output current rating or total output module
current rating.

Figure 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Embedded Digital Output Point Wiring Diagram

DC
OUTPUT
Load
Load

Load
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load

24 VDC
SOURCE

150 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

The following graphic shows an example of how to connect 2-wire systems to

embedded output points 0…4 and use an external terminal block with a bus
connector strip.

IMPORTANT Do not exceed the per point output current rating or total output module
current rating.

Figure 21 - CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Embedded Digital Output Point Wiring Diagram

DC
OUTPUT
Load
Load
Load
Load
Load

24 VDC
SOURCE

Terminal Block with Bus Connector Strip

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 151

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Local Expansion Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support the use of 1734 POINT I/O

modules as local expansion modules along the POINTBus backplane.

IMPORTANT For a full description of how to use 1734 POINT I/O modules, see the POINT I/O
Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O Modules, publication
1734-UM001.

Consider the following when using local expansion modules:

• The controllers support this many local expansion modules.
Table 8 - Maximum 1734 POINT I/O Modules Available as Local Expansion Modules
Cat. No. Local 1734 POINT I/O Modules Supported, max
1769-L16ER-BB1B 6
1769-L18ER-BB1B 8
1769-L18ERM-BB1B

• You can use up to the maximum number of 1734 POINT I/O modules
with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers listed in Table 8, as long as
the total current drawn by the embedded I/O and local expansion modules
does not exceed the available POINTBus backplane current of 1 A and/or
field power current of 3 A.

Depending on your application’s configuration, you can use one of the

following devices to make additional POINTBus backplane current and/
or field power current available:

– 1734-EP24DC POINT I/O Expansion Power Supply - An

expansion power supply is installed between embedded I/O modules
and local expansion modules or between local expansion modules.

The expansion power supply breaks the available POINTBus

backplane current between the modules to its left and right. With the
expansion power supply installed, the modules to its left can draw up to
1 A of POINTBus backplane current and the modules to its right can
draw as much current as that provided by the expansion power supply.

Additionally, the expansion power supply breaks the available field

power current between the modules to its left and right With the
expansion power supply installed, the modules to its left can draw up to
3 A of field power current and the modules to its right can draw as
much field power current as allowed by the expansion power supply.

For more information on the 1734-EP24DC expansion power supply,

see the POINT I/O 24V DC Expansion Power Supply Installation
Instructions, publication 1734-IN058.

152 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

– 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power Distributor Module - A field

power distributor module can also be installed between embedded I/O
modules and local expansion modules or between local expansion
modules.

The field power distributor module breaks the available field power
current between the modules to its left and right. With the field power
distributor module installed, the modules to its left can draw up 3 A of
field power current, and the modules to its right can draw as much field
power current as allowed by the field power distributor.

For more information on the 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power

Distributor module, see the POINT I/O Field Power Distributor
Module Installation Instructions, publication 1734-IN059.

IMPORTANT Remember, the field power distributor module only changes the level
of field power current available in the system. It does not affect the
level of POINTBus backplane current available.

• You must connect an external 24V DC power source to the FP+ and FP-
terminals on the controller’s removable connector to provide power to
input and output devices connected to the local expansion modules.

IMPORTANT We recommend that you put a user-replaceable fuse with overcurrent

protection of 4…6 A in line between the incoming power and the FP
terminals.

The controller’s local expansion modules’ field-side power requirement is

24V DC nominally with an input range of 10…28.8V DC.

For more information on how to connect a power source to the FP+ and
FP- terminals, see page 140.

• We recommend that you make sure all of the 1734 POINT I/O modules
that you intend as local expansion modules are upgraded to the most
current firmware revision before installing them in a CompactLogix 5370
L1 control system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 153

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

• Each local expansion module’s available RPI range is 1.0…750.0 ms and

can be changed by 0.5 ms increments. The default setting is module-
dependent.

You can configure specific RPI values for each local expansion module in
your control system. However, the complete I/O configuration has an
impact on the rate at which data is actually transmitted in a CompactLogix
5370 L1 control system. For more information, see Estimate Requested
Packet Interval on page 158.

• Before installing a 1734 POINT I/O module into a CompactLogix 5370

L1 control system, make sure the I/O module is set to Autobaud. 1734
POINT I/O modules are set to Autobaud by default.

If you need to return a 1734 POINT I/O module to Autobaud, see the
POINT I/O Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O
Modules, publication 1734-UM001.

• When possible, use specialty 1734 POINT I/O modules to meet unique
application requirements.

• Make sure that there are no empty slots between the controller and local
expansion modules or between local expansion modules.

• The Expansion I/O parameter in the controller’s project must match the
number of local expansion modules installed in the system exactly or the
controller will not establish connections to the local expansion modules.

• You must use a 1734-232ASC, firmware revision 4.001 or later, to access

an RS-232 network in your CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller
application.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Consider the following when using distributed I/O modules over an

EtherNet/IP network:

• Each remote EtherNet/IP adapter included in the system must be counted

toward the controller’s maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes.

For more information on maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes, see

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 118.

• The configurable RPI settings vary depending on which distributed I/O

modules are used in the system.

• For information on adding distributed I/O modules to your

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system, see Configure Distributed I/O
Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 173.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system that uses
all three I/O module options.
Embedded I/O Module Local Expansion Modules

8 7
6 5

4 3
2 1

Distributed I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 155

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Validate I/O Layout You must validate the layout of 1734 POINT I/O modules in your
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system. Consider these points when validating
I/O layout placement:
• Set the Number of Local Expansion Modules
• Empty Slots and Removal and Insertion Under Power Situations
• Estimate Requested Packet Interval
• Module Faults Related to RPI Estimates
• Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Set the Number of Local Expansion Modules

You must specify the number of local expansion modules to be used in a

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system when creating a new project, as shown
below, or when the number of local expansion modules is changed.

Each time the controller is powered up, it compares the number of local
expansion modules present on the POINTBus backplane to the Expansion I/O
value. The controller does not allow any I/O connections until the number of
local expansion modules present equals the Expansion I/O value.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Empty Slots and Removal and Insertion Under Power Situations

The POINT I/O system cannot detect an empty terminal base. For this reason,
there are numerous situations in which you can potentially configure a system
that is unusable or one that exercises unintended control.

Follow these rules for I/O system configuration and RIUP of I/O modules.

IMPORTANT 1734 POINT I/O modules support RIUP in CompactLogix 5370 L1 control
systems.

• A correct I/O system does not have any empty terminal bases. If necessary,
you can use a 1734-ARM POINT I/O Address Reserve module to
temporarily replace a 1734 POINT I/O module in a CompactLogix 5370
control system.

• After you cycle power, the controller only allows I/O connections if the
number of local expansion modules present on POINTBus matches the
value used for the Expansion I/O parameter in the project.

• If a 1734 POINT I/O module is removed under power, the operation of

the other I/O modules is not disrupted.

• When you remove an I/O module that has an active connection from the
controller, the controller I/O status indicator flashes green to indicate the
condition.

IMPORTANT If you enabled the 'Major Fault On Controller If Connection Fails While
in Run Mode' parameter when configuring the module in the
RSLogix 5000 project, removal of the module causes the controller to
transition to a major fault condition.

• If more than one contiguous module is removed under power, connections

to all modules in the contiguous missing module set are disallowed until all
modules are replaced. The controller cannot detect an empty base.
Therefore, it does not know the physical positioning of the modules until
all of the missing modules are replaced.

• If a module separating two sets of contiguous missing modules is removed,

the two sets merge into a single set. All of the modules must be replaced
before connections are permitted to any module in the set.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 157

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

• If modules of different types are removed and returned to the wrong

locations, attempts to connect to these modules fail during verification of
Electronic Keying.

IMPORTANT If Electronic Keying is set to Disable Keying, no verification of electronic

keying occurs and unintended control might occur.

• If modules of the same type are removed and returned to the wrong
locations, they accept connections from the controller and reconfigure
with the correct data once they pass their electronic keying check.

Estimate Requested Packet Interval

The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the
controller sends data to and receives data from I/O modules. You set an RPI rate
for each I/O module in your system.

The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers always attempt to scan an I/O module

at the configured RPI rate. For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap
minor fault occurs if there are enough I/O modules with RPI rates set too fast
that they cannot all be serviced in the allotted interval.

The specific configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on

actual RPI rates. These configuration factors can impact the effective scan
frequency for any individual module:
• Rates at which other 1734 POINT I/O modules’ RPI rates are set
• Number of other 1734 POINT I/O modules in the system
• Types of other 1734 POINT I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

In general, follow these guidelines when setting the RPI rates in a

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system:
• For digital I/O modules:
– 1…2 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
– 3…4 modules can be scanned in 4 ms.
– 5…8 modules can be scanned in 8 ms.

IMPORTANT When considering digital I/O modules, remember that they can be the
embedded I/O module on the controller or 1734 POINT I/O modules
used as Local Expansion Modules. Therefore, the consideration for
using two modules can be the embedded I/O module and a 1734
POINT I/O module or two 1734 POINT I/O modules.

158 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

• For specialty and analog I/O modules (except 1734-485ASC modules):

– 1 module can be scanned at 20ms.
– For each additional module add 20ms.
For example, if a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system uses two analog
modules, the module can be scanned in 40 ms.

• For 1734-485ASC modules, the sum total data size for all ASC modules
determines the RPI rates:
– For total data size less than 20 bytes, each module can be scanned
in 20 ms.
– For data size greater than 20 bytes, use the size value as the RPI.
For example, if the total data size is 40 bytes, each ASC module can be
scanned in 40 ms.

You are not required to set individual 1734 POINT I/O modules’ RPI values to
the values listed above. For example, if your application scans one or two
modules, you do not have to use RPI rates of 2 ms. Remember, though, that
higher RPI rates result in scanning the data less frequently.

The RPI shows how quickly modules can be scanned, not how quickly an
application can use the data. The RPI is asynchronous to the program scan.
Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O throughput.

Module Faults Related to RPI Estimates

When following the guidelines described on page 158, most

CompactLogix 5370 L1 control systems operate as expected.

Some systems that follow the guidelines may experience minor faults described in
the following table.
Name Fault Condition In Which Fault Occurs
Information
Module (Type 03) I/O fault This fault is logged when an I/O module's current RPI update overlaps with its
RPI (Code 94) Module previous RPI update. The Minor Faults tab in the Controller Properties dialog box
Overlap RPI overlap indicates which module's RPI is overlapping.
detected If multiple I/O modules experience the fault, the application indicates the fault
Module Slot = x, occurred on the first such I/O module. Typically, it is an I/O module with a lower RPI
where x is the slot rate and/or an I/O module with large input/output data sizes. For example, the
number of the I/O 1734-232ASC and 1734-485ASC modules use large input/output data sizes.
module in the I/O Once the fault is cleared from the first I/O module, the application indicates the
Configuration next module experiencing the fault.This pattern continues until the fault is cleared
section from all affected I/O modules.
To avoid this fault, set the I/O modules’ RPI rate to a higher numerical value.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 159

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Calculate System Power Consumption

An embedded 24V DC nominal, non-isolated power supply with an input range

of 10…28.8V DC powers the CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

The embedded power supply provides 1 A @ 5V DC to the POINTBus

backplane to power all system components, including local expansion modules,
that is 1734 POINT I/O modules, in most system configurations.

In some circumstances, you might configure a system that requires more current
than the system’s embedded power supply provides. This type of configuration
results from using a combination of local expansion modules that, when
combined with current consumption of the rest of the system, exceeds 1 A @ 5V
DC.

In this case, you can take any of the following actions to make sure your system
configuration has enough power:

• Insert a 1734-EP24DC POINT I/O expansion power supply between

local expansion modules to increase the POINTBus backplane power.

• Insert a 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Potential Distribution module

between local expansion modules to renew field power or change the field
power from DC to AC, that is, separate DC I/O modules from AC I/O
modules on the same POINTBus.

IMPORTANT The 1734-FPD POINT I/O Field Power Distributor is required if the
devices connected to the local expansion modules consume more
than 3 A.

Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Before you physically install the I/O modules, you must assemble, mount, and
ground the system as described in Chapter 1, Install the CompactLogix 5370 L1
Controller on page 13.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Use the Event Task The CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers support the use of an Event task with
their embedded input points. You can configure embedded input point terminals
to trigger an Event task if a change of state (COS) occurs.

IMPORTANT When using the Event task with the CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers,
consider these points:
• You can use the Event task only with Logix Designer application, version
21.00.00 and later.
• You can use the Event task only with the controller’s embedded input
points. You cannot use the Event task with input points in the local
expansion modules, for example, a 1734-IB4 module.
• You can use the Event task only if the input point has an input data
state change.
• An event is recognized only when it maintains the same state for at least
the duration of the input filter time specified.
• Configure the Event task at a rate that prevents task overlap conditions.
• Configure the Event task at a rate that is likely to succeed.
A 2 ms signal width is the minimum pulse width that can be used at which
the Event task always succeeds.

You can configure more than one embedded input point to trigger an Event task.
However, we recommend you enable COS for only one point. If you enable COS
for multiple points, a task overlap of the Event task can occur.

You can configure an Event task to trigger if either of these events occur:
• A specific event occurs on a single point on an input module.
• A trigger event does not occur in a specific time interval.

You configure whether the task updates output modules at the end of the task.
After the task executes, it does not execute again until the event occurs again.
Each Event task requires a specific trigger.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 161

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

The following table describes the triggers for an Event task available in a
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.
Trigger Description
Input Data State Change The input point triggers the Event task based on the change of state (COS)
configuration for the point. The COS configuration is set on the Module Definition
dialog box.
Consumed Tag Only one consumed tag can trigger a specific Event task. Use an Immediate Output
(IOT) instruction in the producing controller to signal the production of new data.
Axis Registration 1 or 2 A registration input triggers the Event task.
Axis Watch A watch position triggers the Event task.
Motion Group Execution The coarse update period for the motion group triggers the execution of both the
motion planner and the Event task. Because the motion planner interrupts all other
tasks, it executes first.
EVENT Instruction Multiple EVENT instructions can trigger the same task.

For more information on Event tasks, see the following publications:

• Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual,
publication 1756-PM001
• Using Event Tasks with Logix5000 Controllers, publication
LOGIX-WP003

Complete the following steps to configure the Event task.

1. Open the project.

2. Right-click Embedded Discrete_IO and choose Properties.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

3. On the Module Properties dialog box, complete the following steps.

a. Click the Input Configuration tab.
b. Enable COS for the digital input points on which a state change, that is,
Off to On or On to Off, triggers the Event task.
c. Set the desired input filter time for each COS-enabled input point.

IMPORTANT An event is recognized only when it maintains the same state for at
least the duration of the input filter time specified.

d. Click OK.

4. Right-click Tasks and choose New Task.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 163

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

5. On the New Task dialog box, complete the following steps.

a. Name the task.
b. Change the task type to Event.
c. Choose the trigger.
d. Select the tag.
e. If desired, set a time so the Event task executes if no event occurs with
the value.
On the following example dialog box, the time is 10 ms. If no event
occurs for 10 ms, the Event tasks executes.
f. Set the task priority.
The default Event task priority level is 10. For more information about
Event tasks, see Using Event Tasks with Logix5000 Controllers white
paper, LOGIX-WP003.

g. Make additional desired configuration changes.

h. Click OK.

The new Event task appears in the Controller Organizer.

164 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Configure I/O Complete these steps to add a 1734 POINT I/O module to your
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

1. Right-click PointIO and choose New Module.

You can also right-click Expansion I/O.

2. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 165

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Common Configuration Parameters

While the configuration options vary from module to module, there are some
common options you typically configure when using 1734 POINT I/O modules
in a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system, as described in Table 9.
Table 9 - Common Configuration Parameters
Configuration Option Description
Requested packet interval (RPI) The RPI specifies the interval at which data is transmitted or received over a connection. For POINTBus backplane local expansion
modules, data is transmitted to the controller at the RPI.
When scanned on the local bus or over an EtherNet/IP network, I/O modules are scanned at the RPI specified in the module
configuration. Typically, you configure an RPI in milliseconds (ms).
• For local expansion modules, the range is 1.0…750 ms and the RPI must be configured in 0.5 ms increments. That is, you cannot set
the RPI to a value of 2.3 ms. It must be 2.0 or 2.5.
• For remote I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network, the range is 2.0…750 ms and the RPI must be configured in 1.0 ms
increments. That is, you cannot set the RPI to a value of 2.3 ms. It must be 2.0 or 3.0.
Module definition Set of configuration parameters that affects data transmission between the controller and the I/O module. The parameters include the
following:
• Series - Module’s hardware series.
• Revision - Major and minor firmware revision levels used on the module.
• Electronic keying - See page 167.
• Connection - Type of connection between the controller writing the configuration and the I/O module, such as Output.
• Data format - Type of data transferred between the controller and I/O module and what tags are generated when the configuration is
complete.
Major Fault on Controller If Connection This option determines how the controller is affected if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode or if the controller is unable to
Fails While in Run Mode establish a connection to the module. You can configure the project so that a connection failure causes a major fault on the controller or
not. The default setting is for the option to be disabled.
For example, if this option is enabled and an I/O module is removed while in Run mode, a major fault occurs on the controller. The default
setting for the embedded I/O module is that this option is enabled. The default setting for local expansion modules is that this option is
disabled.

I/O Connections
A CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system uses connections to transmit I/O data.
Table 10 describes the connection types.

IMPORTANT You can only use direct connections with the local expansion modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.

Table 10 - I/O Module Connections

Connection Description
Direct A direct connection is a real-time, data-transfer link between the controller and an I/O module. The controller maintains and monitors
the connection. Any break in the connection, such as a module fault, causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area
associated with the module.
Typically, analog I/O modules, diagnostic I/O modules, and specialty modules require direct connections.
Rack-optimized Rack-optimized connections are not available with local expansion modules used in CompactLogix 5370 L1 control systems.For digital
I/O modules, you can select rack-optimized connections.
This option is used with distributed I/O modules and the Rack Optimization connection selection is made when configuring the remote
adapter. For example, if you want to use a rack-optimized connection with digital I/O modules in a remote 1734 POINT I/O system, you
configure the 1734-AENT(R) module to use a connection type of Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection consolidates connection usage between the controller and all of the digital I/O modules in a remote chassis
or on a single DIN rail. Rather than having individual, direct connections for each I/O module, there is one connection for the entire rack
(or DIN rail).

166 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Electronic Keying The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module, as
shown in the I/O Configuration tree, to the physical module before I/O
communication begins. You can use electronic keying to help prevent
communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected.

For each module in the I/O Configuration tree, the user-selected keying option
determines if, and how, an electronic keying check is performed. Typically, three
keying options are available:
• Exact Match
• Compatible Keying
• Disabled Keying

You must carefully consider the benefits and implications of each keying option
when selecting between them. For some specific module types, fewer options are
available.

Electronic keying is based on a set of attributes unique to each product revision.

When a Logix5000 controller begins communicating with a module, this set of
keying attributes is considered.
Table 11 - Keying Attributes
Attribute Description
Vendor The manufacturer of the module, for example, Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley.
Product Type The general type of the module, for example, communication adapter, AC drive, or digital I/O.
Product Code The specific type of module, generally represented by its catalog number, for example,
1734-OB4E.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities and data exchange formats of the module.
Typically, although not always, a later, that is higher, Major Revision supports at least all of the
data formats supported by an earlier, that is lower, Major Revision of the same catalog number
and, possibly, additional ones.
Minor Revision A number that indicates the module’s specific firmware revision. Minor Revisions typically do not
impact data compatibility but may indicate performance or behavior improvement.

You can find revision information on the General tab of a module’s Properties
dialog box.

Figure 22 - General Tab

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 167

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Exact Match

Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes, that is, Vendor, Product Type,
Product Code (catalog number), Major Revision, and Minor Revision, of the
physical module and the module created in the software to match precisely to
establish communication. If any attribute does not match precisely, I/O
communication is not permitted with the module or with modules connected
through it, as in the case of a communication module.

Use Exact Match keying when you need the system to verify that the module
revisions in use are exactly as specified in the project, such as for use in highly-
regulated industries. Exact Match keying is also necessary to enable Automatic
Firmware Update for the module via the Firmware Supervisor feature from a
Logix5000 controller.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Exact Match keying prevents I/O communication.

The module configuration is for a 1734-OB4E module with module revision 3.1.
The physical module is a 1734-OB4E module with module revision 3.2. In this
case, communication is prevented because the Minor Revision of the module
does not match precisely.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 1

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
Communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Compatible Keying
Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or
reject communication. Different module families, communication adapters, and
module types implement the compatibility check differently based on the family
capabilities and on prior knowledge of compatible products. Release notes for
individual modules indicate the specific compatibility details.

Compatible Keying is the default setting. Compatible Keying allows the physical
module to accept the key of the module configured in the software, provided that
the configured module is one the physical module is capable of emulating. The
exact level of emulation required is product and revision specific.

With Compatible Keying, you can replace a module of a certain Major Revision
with one of the same catalog number and the same or later, that is higher, Major
Revision. In some cases, the selection makes it possible to use a replacement that
is a different catalog number than the original.

When a module is created, the module developers consider the module’s

development history to implement capabilities that emulate those of the previous
module. However, the developers cannot know future developments. Because of
this, when a system is configured, we recommend that you configure your module
using the earliest, that is, lowest, revision of the physical module that you believe
will be used in the system. By doing this, you can avoid the case of a physical
module rejecting the keying request because it is an earlier revision than the one
configured in the software.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Compatible Keying prevents I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1734-OB4E module with module revision
3.3. The physical module is a 1734-OB4E module with module revision 3.2.
In this case, communication is prevented because the minor revision of the
module is lower than expected and may not be compatible with 3.3.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 3

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 169

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Compatible Keying allows I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1734-OB4E module with module revision 1.2.
The physical module is a 1734-OB4E module with module revision 3.2. In this
case, communication is allowed because the major revision of the physical
module is higher than expected and the module determines that it is
compatible with the prior major revision.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is allowed.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Disabled Keying

Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when
attempting to communicate with a module. Other attributes, such as data size
and format, are considered and must be acceptable before I/O communication is
established. With Disabled Keying, I/O communication may occur with a
module other than the type specified in the I/O Configuration tree with
unpredictable results. We generally do not recommend using Disabled Keying.

ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying; if used

incorrectly, this option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage,
or economic loss.

If you use Disabled Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding
whether the module being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the
application.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Disable Keying prevents I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1734-OB4E digital output module. The
physical module is a 1734-IT2I thermocouple input module. In this case,
communication is prevented because the analog module rejects the data
formats that the digital module configuration requests.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Thermocouple
input module
Catalog Number = 1734-IT2I
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 171

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Disable Keying allows I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1734-OB2E module. The physical module is a
1734-OB4E module. In this case, communication is allowed because the two
digital modules share common data formats.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB2E
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is allowed.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1734-OB4E
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

172 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
an EtherNet/IP network.
Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network IMPORTANT When adding distributed I/O modules, remember to count the remote Ethernet
adapter to remain within the maximum number of EtherNet/IP network nodes
limitation for your specific controller.
The distributed I/O modules connected to the controller via the remote
Ethernet adapter are not counted toward the maximum Ethernet node limit for
the controller.
For example, a 1769-L16ER-BB1B controller supports up to four Ethernet
nodes. You can add up to four remote Ethernet adapters to the I/O
Configuration section because each remote adapter counts against the node
count. However, you can add as many remote I/O modules to the adapter’s
chassis as necessary. Remote I/O modules do not count against the node count.
For more information on node limitations, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 118.

Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on an

EtherNet/IP network.

1. Right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 173

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new Ethernet adapter as necessary and click OK.

4. Right-click the new adapter and choose New Module.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

5. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

6. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

7. Repeat these steps to add all of the desired distributed I/O modules to
the project.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B control system

that uses distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

1794-AENT FLEX I/O Adapter Connected 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter

Via a 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap with POINT I/O Modules

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O

PanelView Plus Terminal

Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power

Computer
IP ADDRESS

with Ethernet Port

Link 2
Activity/
Status

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Control System

Kinetix 6500 Drive and Motor Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via a
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 175

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Monitor I/O Modules With CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers, you can use the following options to
monitor I/O modules:

• Quick View Pane below the Controller Organizer

• Connection tab in the Module Properties dialog box

• Programming logic to monitor fault data so you can take

appropriate action.

When a fault occurs on an I/O module, a yellow triangle on the module’s

appearance in the Controller Organizer alerts you to the fault.

The following graphic shows the Quick View Pane indicating the type of fault.

176 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers Chapter 7

To see the fault description on the Connection tab in Module Properties dialog
box, complete these steps.

1. In the I/O Configuration, right-click the faulted I/O module and

choose Properties.

2. Click the Connection tab and use the fault description, in the Module
Fault section, to diagnose the issue.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and remedy the issue.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 177

Chapter 7 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L1 Controllers

Bus Off Detection and Recovery

When the POINTBus backplane experiences a bus off condition, the

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller indicates this condition via a BUS OFF
minor fault (Type 03, Code 01). When this fault occurs, the connections
between the controller and I/O modules are broken.

Complete these steps to identify the source of the BUS OFF minor fault.

1. Make sure the number of local expansion modules in the project matches
the number of modules physically installed in the system.
2. Make sure all mounting bases are locked and I/O modules are securely
installed on mounting bases.
3. Make sure all 1734 POINT I/O modules are configured to use the
Autobaud rate.

IMPORTANT You cannot change a 1734 POINT I/O module’s Autobaud setting when
the module is installed in a CompactLogix 5370 L1 control system.
If you need to return a 1734 POINT I/O module to Autobaud, see the
POINT I/O Digital and Analog Modules and POINTBlock I/O Modules,
publication 1734-UM001.

If these steps do not remedy the fault condition, contact Rockwell Automation
technical support.

178 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 8

Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370

L2 Controllers

This chapter explains how to use I/O modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2

control system.

Topic Page
Select I/O Modules 179
Embedded Analog I/O Modules Data Arrays 199
Validate I/O Layout 213
Configure Local I/O Modules 219
Electronic Keying 222
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 229
Monitor I/O Modules 234

Select I/O Modules CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems offer these I/O module options:
• Embedded I/O Modules
• Local Expansion Modules - Optional
• Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 179

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Embedded I/O Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers provide embedded I/O modules. The

number and type of points is determined by catalog number. The following table
describes what embedded I/O modules are supported by CompactLogix 5370
L2 controllers.
Cat. No. Sourcing Sinking High-speed High-speed Universal Analog
24V DC 24V DC Counters Counter Analog Output
Digital Digital Output Input Points
Input Output Points Points
Points Points
1769-L24ER-QB1B 16 16 - - - -
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B 4 4 4 2
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B

IMPORTANT Remember the following when using the embedded I/O modules on
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers:
• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller - The digital input points and digital output
points are located on a single embedded I/O module. Therefore, the
1769-L24ER-QB1B controller is considered to have one embedded
I/O module.

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers - The digital

input points and digital output points are located on a single embedded I/O
module. The high-speed counter input output points, universal analog
input points, and analog output points are located on another single
embedded I/O module. Therefore, the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-
L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are considered to have two
embedded I/O modules.

You configure an RPI rate for the embedded I/O modules to establish specific
time intervals at which data is transmitted between the controller and each
embedded I/O point. The embedded I/O points’ available RPI range is
0.5…750.0 ms and can be changed by 0.5 ms increments. The default setting
is 20 ms.

IMPORTANT • If you attempt to use an RPI value that is not valid, the application
automatically rounds the value down to the closest 0.5 ms increment when
you apply the change.
For example, if you set the RPI = 1.75 ms, when you click Apply or OK, the
value is rounded down to 1.5 ms and then applied.

• The RPI value for an embedded I/O module is intended to establish a

specific time interval at which data is transmitted. However, the actual
time interval of data transmission may be affected by the configuration of
your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.
For more information, see Estimate Requested Packet Interval on page 213.

180 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded Digital I/O Points

The embedded digital I/O module on CompactLogix 5370 L2 contains sixteen

24V DC sinking inputs and sixteen 24V DC sourcing outputs. The inputs can be
configured to use digital filtering by input group. Filter times can be specified for
both OFF to ON and ON to OFF.

Group 0 is used to configure inputs 0…7. Group 1 is used to configure inputs

8…15. The default filter time for each group is 8 ms. You can the filter times to
0.0 ms, 0.1 ms, 0.5 ms, 1.0 ms, 2.0 ms, and 4.0 ms, as shown in this graphic.

Figure 23 shows the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers’ embedded digital

I/O points.

IMPORTANT Figure 23 shows the embedded digital I/O points on the 1769-L24ER-QB1B
controller. The embedded digital I/O points on the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and wired the same.

Figure 23 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Digital I/O Module Wiring

Termination Points

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Digital Input 04 12
QB1B
SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

Points
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

05 13
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN 06 14
00 08
01 09

02 10
07 15
03 11

04 12
COM COM
05 13
0 1
06 14
07 15
NC NC
COM COM
0 1
NC NC +V +V
+V +V

00 08

01 09
00 08
02 10

03 11 01 09
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
04 12

05 13

06 14
Digital Output 02 10

Points
07 15
COM COM
0 1 03 11
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG
04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 181

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 24 shows an example wiring diagram for the embedded digital

input points.

Figure 24 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Digital Input Point Wiring Diagram

+ DC (Sinking)
- DC (Sourcing)
DC IN

00
01

02

03
24V DC
04

05

06
07
COM
0
- DC (Sinking)
+ DC (Sourcing) NC

Figure 25 shows an example wiring diagram for the embedded digital

output points.

Figure 25 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Digital Output Point Wiring Diagram

+ DC +V
CR 00

01
CR 02

03
24V DC
04

CR 05
06

CR 07

- DC COM
0
DC OUT

182 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded Analog I/O Points

IMPORTANT The embedded analog I/O points are available on the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers only.

The 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers support

four embedded universal analog inputs that can function as differential or single-
ended inputs and two embedded standard analog outputs that can function as
single-ended outputs. The inputs and outputs are considered channels. Each
channel configuration offers multiple configuration options.

Table 12 lists the available embedded analog input channel types and ranges for
the channel type. The configuration choices are made on the Input
Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box, as shown in the table.
Table 12 - Input Types
Input Type Input Ranges Project Configuration
Voltage • Type -50 mV…50 mV
• Type -100 mV…100 mV
• 0…5V
• 1…5V
• 0…10V
• -10V…10V
Current • 0…20 mA
• 4…20 mA
Thermocouple • J
• K at 1370…1372 °C
(2498…2501.6 °F)
• K at -200…1370 °C
(-328…2498 °F)
• T
• E
• S and R at 0…1768 °C
(32…3214.4 °F)
• S and R at -50…0 °C
(-58…32 °F)
• B at 300…1820 °C
(572…3308 °F)
• B at 250…300 °C (482…572 °F)
• N
• C
RTD • 100 Ω Platinum 385
• 200 Ω Platinum 385
• 500 Ω Platinum 385
• 1000 Ω Platinum 385
• 100 Ω Platinum 3916
• 200 Ω Platinum 3916
• 500 Ω Platinum 3916
• 1000 Ω Platinum 3916
• 10 Ω Copper 426
• 120 Ω Nickel 618
• 120 Ω Nickel 672
• 604 Ω Nickel-Iron 518
Resistance • 0…150 Ω
• 0…500 Ω
• 0…1000 Ω
• 0…3000 Ω

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 183

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 26 shows the embedded analog I/O points and how each termination
point is used with different analog input types.

IMPORTANT Figure 26 shows the embedded analog I/O points on the

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller. The embedded analog I/O points on the
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and
wired the same.

Figure 26 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Embedded Analog I/O Wiring Termination Points

V V
in in
0+ 2+
I I
in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
L27ERM
A0 B0 Z0
in in
0- 2-
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE

IN

QBFC1B
HIGH SPEED
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 A1 B1 Z1

V
OUT
SOURCE

OUTPUT
24VDC

CJC
DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

+ in
DC IN

A0+ A0-
HSC
3+
00 08
01 09 B0+ B0-
CJC inI
02 10 Z0+ Z0-
- 3+
03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1- V V/I

Z1+ Z1-
in in
05 13

06 14 +V +V
1+ 3-
07 15
OUT OUT
0 2 I V/I
COM COM
0 1
OUT 0UT
1 3 in in
NC NC COM COM 1+ 1-
+V +V
V V
in in
0+ 2+ V V
00 08
I
in in
0+ 2+
I
OUT OUT
01 09
V/I V/I
in in
0- 2-
0+ 1+
02 10 CJC inV
+ 3+ I I
03 11 CJC inI
- 3+ OUT OUT
04 12
V V/I
in in
1+ 3-
0+ 1+
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14
07 15
OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG
ANALOG
+24VDC COM FG

Terminal Point Labels Terminal Point Labels

In V V In V V
in in EXC 0 in in EXC 1
0+ 0+ 2+ 2+ 0+ 2+
I I I I
N.C. in in N.C. N.C. in in N.C.
0+ 2+ 0+ 2+
In V/I V/I In V/I V/I
in in SEN 01 in in SEN 11
0- 0- 2- 2- 0- 2-
CJC CJC V In CJC CJC V
+ + in 3+ + + in SEN 12
3+ 3+
CJC I CJC I
CJC in N.C. CJC in N.C.
- - 3+ - - 3+
In V V/I In V V/I
in in 3- SEN 02 in in RTN 1
1+ 1+ 3- 1+ 3-
I V/I In I V/I
N.C. in in N.C. in in RTN 0
1+ 1- 1- 1+ 1-
V V V V
OUT OUT OUT OUT
0+ 1+ 0+ 1+
I I I I
OUT OUT OUT OUT
0+ 1+ 0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM

Thermocouple Input Type Connections RTD and Resistance Input Type Connections

184 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Figure 27 shows an example of ungrounded and grounded thermocouple wiring

diagrams on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 27 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Thermocouple Wiring Diagrams

Ungrounded Thermocouple Grounded Thermocouple

+ V V + V V
in in in in
0+ 2+ 0+ 2+
I I I I
- in in
0+ 2+ - in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I V/I V/I
in in in in
0- 2- 0- 2-
CJC inV CJC inV
+ 3+ + 3+
CJC inI CJC inI
- 3+ - 3+
V V/I V V/I
in in in in
1+ 3- 1+ 3-
Earth Ground I V/I
in in
Earth Ground I V/I
in in
1+ 1- 1+ 1-
V V V V
OUT OUT OUT OUT
0+ 1+ 0+ 1+
I I I I
OUT OUT OUT OUT
0+ 1+ 0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
ANALOG ANALOG

IMPORTANT: You must order Cold Junction Connectors, catalog number

1769-CJC, separately from the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers.

Figure 28 shows an example of devices with differential connections wired to the

embedded analog inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller when it is
operating with voltage or current input types.

Figure 28 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Differential Connections Diagrams

Voltage Input Type Current Input Type

Differential Voltage Differential Current
Connections Connections

Differential
+ V V + Differential
IMPORTANT: For both in
0+
in
2+
Voltage Current
input types, we I I

recommend that you

Transmitter - in
0+
V/I
in
2+
V/I
- Transmitter
in in
use Belden #8761or 0- 2-
V
CJC
equivalent cable. + in
3+
CJC inI
- 3+
V V/I
in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
in in
Earth Ground 1+ 1- Earth Ground
V V
Ground the shield OUT OUT
0+ 1+ Ground the shield
locally at the I I
OUT OUT
locally at the
module. 0+ 1+ module.
COM COM
ANALOG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 185

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 29 shows an example of devices with single-ended connections wired to

the embedded analog inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller when it is
operating with voltage or current input types.

Figure 29 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Single-ended Connections Wiring Diagrams

Voltage Input Type Current Input Type

Single-ended Voltage Single-ended Current
Connections Connections
IMPORTANT: For single-ended
connections, remember the
following: Voltage Transmitter Current Transmitter
• For both input types, we V V
Power + + Signal in in Signal + + Power
recommend that you use 0+
I
2+
I
Supply - Ground in in - Supply
Belden #8761or equivalent 0+ 2+
V/I V/I
cable. in
0-
in
2-
• The mV ranges with the CJC V
+ in
3+
Voltage input type do not CJC inI
- 3+
support single-ended V V/I
in in
1+ 3-
encoder wiring. I V/I
in in
• All commons are electrically Earth 1+ 1- Earth
V V
OUT OUT
tied together in the 0+ 1+
I I
OUT OUT
controller. 0+ 1+
• If multiple power supplies COM COM
are used, the commons ANALOG

must have the same

reference.

186 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Figure 30 shows an example of 2-wire, 3-wire, and 4-wire RTD/Resistance wiring

diagrams on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 30 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B RTD/Resistance Wiring Diagrams

V V EXC 1
in in
0+ 2+
I I
in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
in in
0- 2-
CJC V
+ in
2-wire Device 3+
I
CJC
Wiring Diagram - in
3+
V V/I RTN 1
in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
OUT OUT
0+ 1+ Earth
COM COM
IMPORTANT: For all ANALOG

wiring diagrams, we
recommend that you
use Belden #83503 or
9533 cable.

V V EXC 1
in in
0+ 2+
I I
in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
in in
0- 2-
SEN 12
CJC inV
+ 3+
CJC inI
3-wire Device - 3+
V V/I RTN 1
Wiring Diagram in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
OUT OUT
Earth
0+ 1+
COM COM
ANALOG

V V EXC 1
in in
0+ 2+
I I
in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I SEN 11
in in
0- 2-
CJC V SEN 12
+ in
3+
4-wire Device CJC in
I
- 3+
Wiring Diagram V V/I RTN 1
in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
OUT OUT
0+ 1+
COM COM
ANALOG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 187

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 13 lists the available embedded analog output channel types and ranges for
the channel type. The configuration choices are made on the Output
Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box, as shown in the table.
Table 13 - Output Types
Output Type Output Project Configuration
Ranges
Voltage • -10…10V
• 0…5V
• 0…10V
• 1…5V
Current • 4…20 mA
• 0…20 mA

Figure 31 shows an example of wiring input devices to the analog output points
on the 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller when it is operating in voltage or
current mode.

Figure 31 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Analog Output Wiring Diagrams

Voltage Analog Current Analog

Output Wiring Output Wiring
Diagram Diagram
V V
in in
0+ 2+
I I
in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
in in
0- 2-
CJC V
+ in
3+
CJC I
- in
3+
V V/I
in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
OUT OUT
Voltage 0+ 1+
Load I I
OUT OUT
0+ 1+ Current
COM COM Load
ANALOG

Earth Ground Earth Ground

188 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded High-speed Counters

IMPORTANT The embedded high-speed counters are available on the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B

and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers only.

The 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers support

four embedded high-speed counters. Each counter is a differential input.
Therefore, two input terminals are required for a single counter. For example, the
A0+ and A0- terminals are required for counter A0.

Each counter uses differential inputs that are compatible with standard
differential-line driver output devices as well as single-ended devices. Figure 32
shows the embedded high-speed counter input points.

IMPORTANT Figure 32 shows the embedded high-speed counters on the 1769-L27ER-QB1B

controller. The embedded high-speed counter points on the 1769-L24ER-
QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and wired the
same.

Figure 32 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Embedded High-speed Counter Wiring

Termination Points

HSC

A0+ A0-
B0+ B0-
L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

QBFC1B
IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Z0+ Z0-
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08
01 09
A0+ A0-
B0+ B0-
A1+ A1-
02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11

04 12
A1+ A1-

B1+ B1-
B1+ B1-
05 13 Z1+ Z1-

+V +V
06 14
07 15
OUT OUT
0 2
Z1+ Z1-
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM

+V +V
V V
in in
0+ 2+
I I
+V +V
00 08 in in
0+ 2+

01 09
V/I V/I
in in
0- 2- OUT OUT
02 10

03 11
CJC in
+ 3+
V

CJC inI
- 3+
0 2
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
04 12
V V/I
in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
OUT 0UT
05 13

06 14
in in
1+ 1-
V V
OUT OUT
0+ 1+
1 3
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM
0 1
COM COM
ANALOG
COM COM
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 189

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Figure 33 shows an example of a differential encoder wired to the embedded

high-speed counter inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 33 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Differential Encoder with High-speed Counter Input

Wiring Diagram

Cable
A0- HSC

A0+ A0+ A0-

B0-
B0+ B0+ B0-
Z0-
Z0+ Z0+ Z0-
External
Power +VDC VS A1+ A1-
Shield
Supply COM GND B1+ B1-
Earth Z1+ Z1-

+V +V
OUT OUT
0 2
OUT 0UT
1 3
Shield/Housing COM COM
Connect only if housing is electronically
isolated from the motor and ground.

Figure 34 shows an example of a single-ended encoder wired to the embedded

high-speed counter inputs on a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller.

Figure 34 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Single-ended Encoder with High-speed Counter

Input Wiring Diagram

Cable
A0- HSC

A0+ A0+ A0-

B0-
B0+ B0+ B0-
Z0-
Z0+ Z0+ Z0-

A1+ A1-
Shield
External +VDC VS
B1+ B1-
Power COM GND Z1+ Z1-
Supply
Earth +V +V
OUT OUT
0 2
OUT 0UT
1 3
COM COM
Shield/Housing
Connect only if housing is electronically
isolated from the motor and ground.

190 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

The embedded high-speed counter also supports four output points. Figure 35
shows a wiring diagram for the embedded high-speed counter output points.

IMPORTANT Figure 35 shows the embedded high-speed counter output points on the
1769-L27ER-QB1B controller. The embedded high-speed counter points on the
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers are organized and
wired the same.

Figure 35 - 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller Embedded High-speed Counter Output

Wiring Diagram

HSC

A0+ A0-

B0+ B0-
Z0+ Z0-

A1+ A1-

B1+ B1-

Z1+ Z1-

+V +V +DC
CR OUT OUT
0 2 CR

OUT 0UT CR 5/24V DC

1 3
COM COM

-DC

Wiring the Embedded I/O Modules

Complete these steps to wire the input and output points on the
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Strip 10 mm (0.39 in) insulation from the end of the wire.
3. Push the wire into the connector hole until it is securely place.

If your wire is too thin to push into the connector hole for secure
placement, we recommend that you connect the wire to a ferrule and then
insert it into the connector hole.

L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
QBFC1B
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
05 13 in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 191

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

4. Repeat step 3 for all embedded I/O wires needed in your application.

To remove a wire from the removable connector, complete these steps.

1. Verify that the control system is not powered.

2. Use a small screwdriver to push on the spring release clip and pull the
wire out.

L27ERM
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
QBFC1B

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
I V/I
05 13 in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC COM FG

If any issues arise with a removable connector and you suspect a connection point
may no longer be functioning as a complete circuit, you can use a continuity
tester to determine if the connection point is operating correctly, that is, the
connection point is a complete circuit.

The indication mechanism, for example, a light illuminating on the tester, varies
by specific continuity tester. The example graphic below shows a continuity tester
with a single connection point. In this case, if the circuit is operating correctly, the
indicator light turns on.

Insert a continuity tester into the suspected I/O connection point as shown in
the following graphic.

Continuity Tester

Small hole on
opposite from
termination point
in removable
connector.

192 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Determine Embedded IMPORTANT This section applies to the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
Module Update Time because only those controllers have and embedded universal analog
input points.

The module update time is the time required for the module to sample and
convert the input signals of all enabled analog input channels and provide the
resulting data values to the controller.

The module update time is calculated by adding the update times for each
enabled analog input channel on the module. Each channel update time
calculation is the result of several configuration choices described in the
following section.

Channel Update Times

The channel update time for an enabled analog input channel is determined by
some combination of the following times:

• Channel Input Type and Filter Frequency Selection Update Time -

Required for channel update time calculation

• Cold Junction Compensation Update Times - Optional for channel

update time calculation time

• Open Circuit Detection Update Time - Optional for channel update time
calculation time

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 193

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Channel Input Type and Filter Frequency Selection Update Time

When you enable an embedded analog input channel, you must select an input
type and a filter frequency for that input. The selections made determine the
value that is required when calculating channel update time.

IMPORTANT Each channel input type has multiple ranges or types. For example, a voltage
input type can use one of six voltage ranges, as listed in Table 12 on page 183.
Regardless of which voltage range the channel uses, the channel update time
remains the same. For more information, see Table 14.

Table 14 shows the channel update times for each channel input type and filter
frequency selection.
Table 14 - Channel Update Times
Channel Update Times Based on Input Type Selection
Filter Frequency Voltage, Current or Resistance or RTD Input
Selection(1) Thermocouple Input Type Type
10 Hz 307 ms 614 ms
50 Hz 67 ms 134 ms
60 Hz 57 ms 114 ms
250 Hz 19 ms 38 ms
500 Hz 13 ms 26 ms
1 kHz 11 ms 22 ms
(1) Filter frequency selections are made on the Input Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box.

194 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Cold Junction Compensation Update Times

When you use any of the thermocouple input types on your embedded analog
input, you might need to account for additional voltage at the junction of the
thermocouple field wires and the input point. Additional voltage can alter the
input signal on that point and, therefore, affect that channel’s update time.

The process of accounting for increased voltage at an input point using a

thermocouple type input is cold junction compensation (CJC). You enable CJC
for a given channel on the Input Configuration tab of the Module Configuration
dialog box, as shown below.

By default, CJC is disabled. You must clear the Disable Cold Junction
Compensation checkbox to use CJC for a given channel.

You are not required to enable CJC for a channel using the thermocouple input
type. If you enable CJC and select Update Cold Junction Compensation every
other scan, an additional update time exists on the channel. This additional
update time increases the overall channel update time.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 195

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

The CJC update time is determined by the filter frequency selection for the
channel. Table 15 shows the CJC update times based on filter
frequency selections.
Table 15 - Channel Update Times
Filter Frequency Selection(1) CJC Update Time
10 Hz 614 ms
50 Hz 134 ms
60 Hz 114 ms
250 Hz 38 ms
500 Hz 26 ms
1 kHz 22 ms
(1) Filter frequency selections are made on the Input Configuration tab of the Module Properties dialog box.

IMPORTANT Keep the following in mind when calculating the CJC update time:
• If multiple input channels are configured to use a thermocouple input type
and a different filter value is selected for each, the CJC update time is
determined by the filter frequency selection with the slowest update time.
For example, if one input channel uses a thermocouple input with a 50 Hz
filter frequency and another input channel uses a thermocouple input with
a 60 Hz filter frequency, the CJC channel update time is 134 ms.
• The CJC update time that increases overall module update time is only used
once regardless of the number of input channels on a module that have CJC
enabled to scan every other scan.
In other words, if your module uses a filter frequency selection of 250 Hz
and includes three channels with CJC enabled to scan every other scan, you
only add one instances of CJC update time to the overall equation. Instead
of including 38 ms for each channel, you include 38 ms once.

Open Circuit Detection Update Time

Open circuit detection is used to verify that the field wiring is physically
connected to the embedded analog input point. If this feature is enabled and field
wiring is disconnected from the input, the application alerts you to the condition
and an open wire bit is set in the project’s tags for the respective input channel.

196 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Open circuit detection can be enabled or disabled on any channel input type with
the exception of an input channel configured to use the 0...20 mA input range.
The configuration selection is made on the Input Configuration tab on the
Module Properties dialog box, as shown in the following graphic. The
configuration choice, that is, enabled or disabled, is the result of selecting an
Open Circuit Response for the channel.

To disable open circuit detection, choosing Disable. To enable open circuit

detection, choose any of the other four options.

Table 16 describes the module response associated with each enable selection.
Table 16 - Open Circuit Detection Response Definitions
Response Option Definition
Upscale Sets the input data value to full upper scale value of channel data word. The full-scale value is
determined by the selected input type and data format.
Downscale Sets the input data value to full lower scale value of channel data word. The low scale value is
determined by the selected input type and data format.
Last State Sets the input data value to the last input value prior to the detection of the open-circuit.
Zero Sets the input data value to 0 to force the channel data word to 0.

When you enable open circuit detection for an input channel, an additional
update time is used to calculate the overall channel type. The increase in channel
update time is 11 ms for each channel that enables open circuit detection
response.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 197

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 17 lists example module update times based on specific channel

configurations.
Table 17 - Example Module Update Times
Example Enabled Analog Input Channel Update Time Calculations Module
Channel Configuration Update
Time
• Channel 0: 57 ms 57 ms
– Input type = Current
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
• Channel 0: Channel 0 update time + Channel 1 update time 171 ms
– Input type = Current 57 ms + 114 ms
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
• Channel 1:
– Input type = RTD
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
• Channel 0: Channel 0 update time + Channel 1 update time 682 ms
– Input type = Voltage (57 ms + 11 ms) + 614 ms
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled
• Channel 1:
– Input type = RTD
– Filter Frequency Selection = 10 Hz
• Channel 0: Channel 0 update time + Channel 1 update time + 898 ms
– Input type = Voltage Channel 2 update time + Channel 3 update time +
– Filter Frequency Selection = 50 Hz CJC Update Time
• Channel 1: 67 ms + (614 ms + 11 ms) + (57 ms + 11 ms)
– Input type = RTD + (13 ms + 11 ms) + 114 ms
– Filter Frequency Selection = 10 Hz
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled
• Channel 2
– Input type = Thermocouple
– Filter Frequency Selection = 60 Hz
– CJC = Enabled
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled
• Channel 3:
– Input type = Thermocouple
– Filter Frequency Selection = 500 Hz
– CJC = Enabled
– Open Circuit Detection = Enabled

198 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Embedded Analog I/O The section describes the data table structures for the embedded analog I/O
modules on the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers. The embedded analog I/O
Modules Data Arrays modules have arrays for the following data:
• Input data
• Output data
• Configuration data

You can access the data via the tags in the application.

IMPORTANT The analog I/O modules data structures apply to the 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers only.
The 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller does not have an embedded analog
I/O module.

Input Array

The embedded analog I/O module’s input data array contains eleven words as
described in Table 18. This array is read-only and the default value for all bits is 0.
Table 18 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers’ Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Input Data Array
Bit
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 0
1 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 1
2 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 2
3 S Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel 3
4 Nu Timestamp Value
5 Nu UI4 OI4 OC4 OC3 OC2 OC1 OC0 Nu SI4 SI3 SI2 SI1 SI0
6 LI3 HI3 UI3 OI3 LI2 HI2 UI2 OI2 LI1 HI1 UI1 OI1 LI0 HI0 UI0 OI0
7 S Cold Junction Compensation Value
8 S Output Data Loopback/Echo Channel 0
9 S Output Data Loopback/Echo Channel 1
10 Nu UO1 OO1 Nu UO0 OO0 Nu SO1 SO0

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 199

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 18 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers’ Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Input Data Array
Bit
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where: Analog Read (Input) Data Value Channel x is the data read from the field device connected to the channel.
Timestamp Value is the timestamp of when data was received at the corresponding channel.
Cold Junction Compensation value is the converted CJC data The data is calculated in the following manner:
• If the CJC is open, the converted value is 25 °C (77 °F).
• If the CJC is not opened and the Update CJC sensor every other scan option is disabled, the converted value is 25 °C (77 °F).
• If the CJC is not opened and the Update CJC sensor every other scan option is enabled, the converted value is the measured temperature.
S Sign bit
Nu Bit not used
SIx General status bit for an input channel. Bits 0…3 are for input channels. Bit 4 is for CJC. If the bit is 0, the channel is operating normally. If the bit is 1, a fault has occurred
on the channel.

OIx Overrange alarm bit for an input channel.

0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Input signal is over normal range.
UIx Underrange alarm bit for an input channel.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = For bits 0…3, that is, input channels, the input signal is under the normal range. For bit 4, that is, channel using the thermocouple/mV, RTD/Resistance input type, the
input value equals the minimum value of the range.
HIx High alarm bit for an input channel 0.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Input signal is above the user-defined range
LIx Low alarm bit for an input channel 0.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Input signal is below the user-defined range.
OCx Open circuit detection bit.
0 = Channel is not experiencing an open circuit condition
1 = Channel is experiencing an open circuit condition
SOx General status bit for output channel 0 or 1.
0 = Channel operating normally
1 = A fault has occurred on the channel
OOx Overrange alarm bit for output channel 0 or 1.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Output signal is over the normal range
UOx Underrange alarm bit for output channel 0 or 1.
0 = Channel is operating normally
1 = Output signal is below the normal range

200 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Output Array

The embedded analog I/O module’s output image array contains four words as
described in Table 19. This array is write-only and the default value for all bits
is 0.
Table 19 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers’ Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Output Data Array
Bit
Word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 S Analog Output Data Value Channel 0
1 S Analog Output Data Value Channel 1
2 Nu CL CH CL CH CL CH CL CH
I3 I3 I2 I2 I1 I1 I0 I0
3 Nu CL CH CL CH
O1 O1 O0 O0
Where: Analog Output Data Value Channel x is the data written to the channel.
S Sign bit
Nu Bit not used
CH Use this bit to cancel High Process Alarm Latch functionality for an input.
Ix 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch
CL Use this bit to cancel Low Process Alarm Latch functionality for an input.
Ix 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch
CH Use this bit to cancel High Process Alarm Latch functionality for an output.
Ox 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch
CL Use this bit to cancel Low Process Alarm Latch functionality for an output.
Ox 0 = Do not cancel
1 = Cancel the alarm latch

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 201

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Configuration Array

The embedded analog I/O module’s configuration image array contains 43 words
as described in Table 20.
Table 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 Real Time Sample Value
1 ETS Nu
2 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit Ch0 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI0
3 Wire & CLCD TU ChIo Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI0 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI0
4 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 0
5 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 0
6 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 0
7 Nu
8 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit ChI 1 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI1
9 Nu TU ChI1 Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI1 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI1
10 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 1
11 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 1
12 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 1
13 Nu
14 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit ChI 2 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI2
15 Wire & CLCD TU ChI1 Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI2 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI2
16 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 2
17 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 2
18 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 2
19 Nu
20 EC Nu EA AL EI EO Open Circuit ChI 3 0V Adj Filter Setting ChI3
21 Nu TU ChI1 Nu Inpt Dta Fm ChI3 Nu Inpt Tp/RngeSel ChI3
22 S Process Alarm High Data Value Universal Input Channel 3
23 S Process Alarm Low Data Value Universal Input Channel 3
24 S Alarm Dead Band Value Universal Input Channel 3
25 Nu
26 CJC Ses Cycle Nu CJC WP Nu TU CJC
Calib
27 Nu
28 EC NU EHI ELI LC ER FM PM Nu PFE
29 Nu Outpt Fm ChI0 Nu Outpt Tp/RngeSel Ch0
30 S Fault Value Channel 0
31 S Program (Idle) Value Channel 0
32 S Clamp High Data Value Channel 0
33 S Clamp Low Data Value Channel 0

202 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Table 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
34 S Ramp Rate Channel 0
35 Nu
36 EC Nu EHI ELI LC ER FM PM Nu PFE
37 Nu Outpt Fm ChI1 Nu Outpt Tp/RngeSel ChI1
38 S Fault Value Channel 1
39 S Program (Idle) Value Channel 1
40 S Clamp High Data Value Channel 1
41 S Clamp Low Data Value Channel 1
42 S Ramp Rate Channel 1
Where: EC Use to enable or disable a channel. Each channel can be individually enabled.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Inpt Use this bit to select the form in which the analog data is returned to the controller and used in the control program.
Dta FM
CHIx
EA Use this bit to enable or disable a channel’s process alarms.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
AL Use this bit to enable or disable alarm latching on a channel’s process alarm.
0 = No latch
1 = Latch
EI Use this bit to enable or disable interrupts on a channel’s process alarms.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
EO Use this bit to enable or disable Open Circuit functionality on a channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Open Use to set the Open Circuit Response for a channel.
Circuit 0 = Upscale
Chx 1 = Downscale
2 = Last State
3 = Zero
OV CJC is performed by default by taking the CJC sensor temperature value for a given channel, converting that to a thermocouple voltage, and adding that
adjust voltage from the measured value prior to converting to a user value. If this bit is set for a given channel, the signal value is directly converted to a user value
(No cold junction compensation performed).
Wire & Use to set the wire mode. The mode is determined by the combination of values in bits 14 and 15, as listed in the following table.
CLCD
Bit 15 Value Bit 14 Value Mode
0 0 3-wire and cycle lead compensation - Enable
0 1 3-wire and cycle lead compensation - Disable
1 0 2-wire (No lead compensation)
1 1 4-wire (No lead compensation)

TU Chx Use to set the temperature units.

0 = Degrees Celsius
1 = Degrees Fahrenheit

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 203

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where Inpt Use these bits to select the form the analog input data is presented to the controller and then used by the controller. This value is determined by the
(cont.) Dta Fm combination of multiple selections in specific words and bits.
ChIx For more information on what selections determine the input data form that is used, see Table 22 on page 207.
Inpt Tp Use these bits to select the input type and operating range for a channel. For more information on what selections determine the input type and operating
/ Rnge range for a channel, see Table 23 on page 207.
Sel
ChIx
Filter Use these bits to select the filter setting for a channel. For more information on what selections determine the filter settings for a channel, see Table 21 on
Setting page 206.
Chx
Process Use to configure the Process Alarm High value for a channel. Configuration is done using words 4, 10, 16, and 22 to set the Alarm High value.
Alarm
High
Data
Value
Channel
x

Process Use to configure the Process Alarm Low value for a channel. Configuration is done using words 5, 11, 17, and 23 to set the Low High value.
Alarm
Low
Data
Value
Channel
x
Alarm Use to configure the Alarm Deadband value for a channel. Configuration is done using words 6, 12, 18, and 24 to set the deadband alarm value.
Dead
Band
Data
Value
Channel
x
ETS Use to enable or disable the timestamping function on the module.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Real Use to set the Real Time Sample value. The available range = 0…5000 ms.
Time
Stamp
Value
Update Use this bit to enable or disable a CJC sensor.
CJCCo • If enabled, the CJC is read once every other module scan, and its value updated in the CJC status word. This value is also used for thermocouple cold
mpens junction compensation.
ationE
n • If disabled, the CJC sensor value is not acquired, and the CJC temperature is fixed at 25 °C (77 °F) for all channels. The CJC will also be fixed at 25 °C
(77 °F) for all channels if it is determined to be broken (short or open circuit).
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Cycle Use this bit to enable Cycle Calibration.
Calib • If enabled, the module's internal calibration occurs once every 5 minutes.
• If disabled, the module’s internal calibration occurs only once at power on/ reset.
Cycle Calibration allows the module to readjust for environmental changes such as variations in temperature. However, the module throughput is slightly
reduced during the calibration operation.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable

204 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Table 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where CJC WP Use this bit to enable or disable the CJC Weighted Profile.
(cont.) • If enabled, the CJC temperature for each channel is scaled by multiplying the single CJC reading by a predefined scale factor derived from lab
measurements of each terminal block pin's stable temperature. In this condition, all channel data is overridden with that channel's CJC temperature.
• If disabled, the single CJC reading is applied directly to all channels. If the CJC sensors are installed in a remote terminal block, the weighted profile must
be disabled. In this condition, channel data is presented in the input table as normal.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
PFE Use this bit to select whether data from the Program/Idle m ode or the Fault Enable mode is applied.
0 = Program/Idle mode data applied
1 = Fault mode data applied
ER Use this bit to enable or disable ramping for each channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
EHI Use this bit to enable or disable the output channel interrupt function when a High Clamp alarm is set.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
ELI Use this bit to enable or disable the output channel interrupt function when a Low Clamp alarm is set.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
PM Use this bit to set data a channel uses when it is in Program/Idle mode.
0 = Hold Last State value
1 = User-defined value
FM Use this bit to set data a channel uses when it is in Fault mode.
0 = Hold Last State value
1 = User-defined value
LC Use this bit to enable or disable latch functionality when Low/High clamp and Under/Over range alarm conditions exist on a channel.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Outpt Use these bits to select the form the analog output data is presented to the controller and then used by the controller. This value is determined by the
Dta Fm combination of multiple selections in specific words and bits.
ChIx For more information on what selections determine the output data form that is used, see Table 24 on page 209.
Outpt Use these bits to select the output type and operating range for a channel. For more information on what selections determine the input type and operating
Tp / range for a channel, see Table 25 on page 209.
Rnge
Sel
ChIx
Fault Use this bit to configure the Fault mode value for a channel.
Value
Channel
x
Program Use this bit to configure the Program/Idle mode value for a channel.
(Idle)
Value
Channel
x

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 205

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 20 - CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Embedded Analog I/O Module’s Configuration Image Array
Word Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Where Clamp Use this bit to configure the Clamp High data value for a channel.
(cont.) High
Data
Value
Channel
x
Clamp Use this bit to configure the Clamp Low data value for a channel.
Low
Data
Value
Channel
x
Ramp Use this bit to set the Ramp Rate value for a channel.
Rate
Channel
x

Input Filter Selections

Table 21 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select a filter setting for a
channel. You use bits 0…3 in words 2, 8, 14, and 20 to make this selection.
Table 21 - Input Filter Selections
Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Filter Value Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit 01 Bit 00
60 Hz 0 0 0 0
50 Hz 0 0 0 1
10 Hz 0 0 1
250 Hz 0 0 1 1
500 Hz 0 1 0 0
1 kHz 0 1 0 1
Spare(1) Values 6…15
(1) An attempt to write a non-valid (any Spare value) or Not Used bit configuration into the Input Filter Response Select field will cause
a Module Configuration Error (contained in the Mod_Condition Array).

206 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Analog Input Data Format

Table 22 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the output data
format for analog data that is sent to the controller for a channel. You use bits 8…10
in words 3, 9, 15, and 21 to make this selection.
Table 22 - Analog Input Data Format
Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Analog Output Data Format Bit 10 Bit 09 Bit 08
Raw/Proportional Data 0 0 0
Engineering Units 0 0 1
Engineering Units x 10 0 1 0
Scaled for PID 0 1 1
Percent Range 1 0 0
Spare(1) Values 5…7
(1) An attempt to write a non-valid (any Spare value) bit configuration into the Input/Output Data Format Select field will cause a
Module Configuration Error (contained in Mod_Condition Array). All bits shown as 0 above shall always be set to 0.

Analog Input Type and Operating Range

Table 23 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the input type and
operating range for a channel. You use bits 0…5 in words 3, 9, 15, 21, 29, and 37 to
make the selections.
Table 23 - Analog Input Type and Operating Range
Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Input Type and Normal
Operating Range Bit 05 Bit 04 Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit Bit 00
-10…10V DC 0 0 0 0 0 0
0…5V DC 0 0 0 0 0 1
0…10V DC 0 0 0 0 1 0
4…20 mA 0 0 0 0 1 1
1…5V DC 0 0 0 1 0 0
0…20 mA 0 0 0 1 0 1
-50 mV…50 mv 0 0 0 1 1 0
-100 mV…100 mV 0 0 0 1 1 1
Thermocouple J 0 0 1 0 0 0
Thermocouple K 0 0 1 0 0 1
Thermocouple T 0 0 1 0 1 0
Thermocouple E 0 0 1 0 1 1
Thermocouple R 0 0 1 1 0 0
Thermocouple S 0 0 1 1 0 1
Thermocouple B 0 0 1 1 1 0
Thermocouple N 0 0 1 1 1 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 207

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 23 - Analog Input Type and Operating Range

Bit Settings
(Words 3, 9, 15, and 21)
Input Type and Normal
Operating Range Bit 05 Bit 04 Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit Bit 00
Thermocouple C 0 1 0 0 0 0
100 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 0 0 1
200 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 0 1 0
500 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 0 1 1
1000 Ω PT 385 0 1 0 1 0 0
100 Ω PT 3916 0 1 0 1 0 1
200 Ω PT 3916 0 1 0 1 1 0
500 Ω PT 3916 0 1 0 1 1 1
1000 Ω PT 3916 0 1 1 0 0 0
10 Ω CU 426 0 1 1 0 0 1
120 Ω Ni 618 0 1 1 0 1 0
120 Ω Ni 672 0 1 1 0 1 1
604 Ω NiFe 518 0 1 1 1 0 0
150 Ω 0 1 1 1 0 1
500 Ω 0 1 1 1 1 0
1000 Ω 0 1 1 1 1 1
3000 Ω 1 0 0 0 0 0

208 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Analog Output Data Format

Table 24 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the output data
format for analog data that is sent to the controller for a channel. You use bits 8…10
in words 29 and 37 to make this selection.
Table 24 - Analog Output Data Format
Bit Settings
(Words 29 and 37)
Analog Output Data Format Bit 10 Bit 09 Bit 08
Raw/Proportional Data 0 0 0
Engineering Units 0 0 1
Scaled for PID 0 1 0
Percent Range 0 1 1
Spare(1) Values 4…7
(1) An attempt to write a non-valid (any Spare value) bit configuration into the Input/Output Data Format Select field will cause a
Module Configuration Error (contained in Mod_Condition Array). All bits shown as 0

Analog Output Type and Operating Range

Table 25 lists the bit value combinations you can use to select the input type and
operating range for a channel. You use bits 0…5 in words 29 and 37 to make the
selections.
Table 25 - Analog Output Type and Operating Range
Bit Settings
(Words 29 and 37)
Output Type and Normal
Operating Range Bit 05 Bit 04 Bit 03 Bit 02 Bit Bit 00
-10…10V DC 0 0 0 0 0 0
0…5V DC 0 0 0 0 0 1
0…10V DC 0 0 0 0 1 0
4…20 mA 0 0 0 0 1 1
1…5V DC 0 0 0 1 0 0
0…20 mA 0 0 0 1 0 1

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 209

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Local Expansion Modules - Optional

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems support the use of Compact I/O

modules as local expansion modules along a CompactBus backplane:

• The controllers support up to four Compact I/O modules as local

expansion modules.

• When possible, use specialty Compact I/O modules to meet unique

application requirements.

• Consider using a 1492 wiring system for each I/O module as an alternative
to the terminal block that comes with the module.

• Use 1492 PanelConnect™ modules and cables if you are connecting input
modules to sensors.

• Install local expansion modules in the same local bank as the

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controller.

Install Local Expansion Modules

Complete these steps to install local expansion modules in your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

1. Attach the Compact I/O modules as described in these publications:

• Compact I/O Modules Installation Instructions, publication
1769-IN088
• Compact I/O DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions,
publication 1769-IN060
2. Use the tongue-and-groove slots to attach a 1769-ECR Compact I/O end
cap terminator to the last module in the system.
3. Move the end cap terminator’s bus lever fully to the left until it clicks to
lock the end cap bus terminator.

Wire Local Expansion Modules

Wire each Compact I/O module used as a local expansion module according to
the technical documentation for that module.

210 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

Consider the following when using distributed I/O modules over an

EtherNet/IP network:

• Each remote EtherNet/IP adapter included in the system must be counted

toward the controller’s maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes.

For more information on maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes, see

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 118.

• The configurable RPI settings vary depending on which distributed I/O

modules are used in the system.

• For information on adding distributed I/O modules to your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, see Configure Distributed I/O
Modules on a DeviceNet Network on page 232.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system on an

EtherNet/IP network that uses all three I/O module options.

Embedded I/O Modules Local Expansion Modules

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
QBFC1B A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

8 7
6 5

4 3
2 1

LINK 1 LINK 2

Distributed I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 211

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

You must use the following to use distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet
network in your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system:

• Logix Designer application or RSLogix 5000 software - For more

information, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 229.

• RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software - For more information, see

Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network on
page 232.

The following graphic shows a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system on a

DeviceNet network that uses all three I/O module options.

Embedded I/O Modules Local Expansion Modules

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

QBFC1B
IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

Distributed I/O Modules

212 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Validate I/O Layout You must validate the layout of I/O modules in your CompactLogix 5370 L2
control system. Consider these points when validating I/O layout placement:
• Estimate Requested Packet Interval
• Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates
• System Power Availability
• Power Supply Distance Rating

Estimate Requested Packet Interval

The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the
controller sends data to and receives data from I/O modules. You set an RPI rate
for each I/O module in your system, including embedded I/O modules, local
expansion modules or distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

The CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers always attempt to scan an I/O module

at the configured RPI rate. The controller scans distributed I/O modules at the
configured RPI rates.

With embedded I/O modules and local expansion modules, however, some
specific system configuration parameters determine the actual rate at which the
controller scans the modules. That is, the controller may be configured to scan an
I/O module at one rate but actually scan the module at a different rate.

For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap minor fault occurs if there is
at least one I/O module that cannot be serviced within its RPI time.

The specific configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on

actual RPI rates. These configuration factors can impact the effective scan
frequency for any individual embedded or local expansion module:
• Rates at which embedded I/O modules’ RPI values are set
• Number of embedded I/O modules used in the system
• Types of embedded I/O modules used in the system
• Rates at which Compact I/O modules’ RPI values are set
• Number of Compact I/O modules in the system
• Types of Compact I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 213

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 26 describes RPI rate guidelines.

Table 26 - Requested Packet Interval Guidelines
Type of Module Guidelines
Digital and analog (any The following guidelines apply:
mix) • 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…6 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
• Some input modules have a fixed 8 ms filter, so selecting a faster RPI has no effect.
Specialty The following conditions apply:
• For every full-sized 1769-SDN module in the system, increase every other module's RPI
by 2 ms.
• For every 1769-HSC module in the system, increase every other module's RPI by 1 ms.
• For every full-sized 1769-ASCII module system, increase every other module's RPI by
1 ms.
• For every 1769-SM2 module in the system, increase every other module's RPI by 2 ms.
For example, if the system includes four I/O modules configured with an RPI = 1 ms and you
add a 1769-SDN module to the system, you should increase the RPI value for all four other
I/O modules by 2 ms. Therefore, when the 1769-SDN module is added to the system the four
other I/O modules should use an RPI = 3 ms.
If, in the same system, you add a second 1769-SDN module, the four other I/O modules’ RPI
value should be increased to 5 ms.

IMPORTANT When considering the number of I/O modules, remember that they can be the embedded I/O
modules on the controller or Compact I/O modules used as local expansion modules.
Therefore, the consideration for using modules can be any of the following system
configurations:
• Embedded I/O modules only
• Compact I/O modules only
• Some combination of embedded I/O modules and Compact I/O modules

You can set individual Compact I/O modules’ RPI rates higher than those listed
in Table 26. The RPI shows how quickly modules can be scanned, not how
quickly an application can use the data. The RPI is asynchronous to the program
scan. Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O throughput.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates

When following the guidelines described in Table 26, most CompactLogix 5370
L2 control systems operate as expected. Some systems that follow the guidelines
may experience a Module RPI Overlap minor fault described in the
following table.
Name Fault Condition in Which Fault Occurs
Information
Module (Type 03) I/O fault This fault is logged when an I/O module's current RPI update overlaps with its
RPI (Code 94) Module previous RPI update. The Minor Faults tab in the Controller Properties dialog box
Overlap RPI overlap indicates which module's RPI is overlapping.
detected If multiple I/O modules experience the fault, the application indicates the fault
Module Slot = x, occurred on the first such I/O module. Typically, it is an I/O module with a large
where x is the slot Input/Output array sizes. Example modules that use large Input/Output array sizes
number of the I/O include the 1769-SDN and 1769-HSC modules. In these cases, we recommend you
module in the I/O adjust the module’s RPI to eliminate the fault.
Configuration Once the fault is cleared from the first I/O module, the application indicates the
section next module experiencing the fault.This pattern continues until the fault is cleared
from all affected I/O modules.
To avoid this fault, set the I/O modules’ RPI rate to higher numerical values. We
recommend you use an RPI value that is not a common multiple of other module
RPI values, such as 2.5 ms, 5.5 ms, or 7 ms:
• We recommend you do not run CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems with
Module RPI Overlap faults.
• A system that experiences many Module RPI Overlap faults may not operate
optimally because I/O data is not sampled at the expected rate determined by
RPI settings.
• When the project is downloaded or an I/O module’s RPI value is adjusted, it is
expected to have a minor fault. Faults under these conditions are transitionary.
Clear the fault and wait for the fault to reappear before adjusting the RPI value
or the task priorities.

System Power Availability

An embedded 24V DC Input, nonisolated power supply powers all components

in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

The embedded power supply provides the following power to the CompactBus:
• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller:
– 1.54 A @ 5V DC
– 0.95 mA @ 24V DC

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers:

– 1 A @ 5V DC
– 0.8 mA @ 24V DC

The embedded power supply can power any combination of controller,

embedded I/O modules and local expansion modules used in your application.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 215

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Power Supply Distance Rating

In a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, you can install Compact I/O

modules on as local expansion modules to the right of the controller system.
Compact I/O modules each have a power supply distance rating that you must
consider before you install them.

Power supply distance rating is the number of slots a Compact I/O module can
be installed away from the power supply. If a Compact I/O modules has a
distance rating of three, you can include up to two modules between the
Compact I/O module and the power supply.

Additionally, the controller has embedded I/O modules that prevent installation
of a Compact I/O module directly to the right of the embedded power supply.
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems have embedded I/O modules in the
controller. CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems have one or two embedded
I/O modules as described below:

• 1769-L24ER-QB1B controller - One embedded I/O module

• 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B and 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controllers - Two

embedded I/O modules

While the embedded I/O modules are not considered local expansion modules,
you still must include each embedded I/O module in the module slot count when
determining where to install Compact I/O module as a local expansion module.

216 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Because CompactLogix 5370 L2 control systems allow only up to four local

expansion modules in the system, you can install most Compact I/O modules in
any local expansion module slot. Some Compact I/O modules have power supply
distance ratings that affect where you can install them in the CompactLogix 5370
L2 control system.

For example, the 1769-ASCII Compact ASCII and 1769-HSC Compact

high-speed counter modules each have a power supply distance rating of four.
The farthest local expansion module slot where you can install either of these
modules in a CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system is module slot number two
or three as determined by the controller catalog number used in the
control system.

Table 27 describes the farthest local expansion module slot where you can install
a 1769-HSC high-speed counter module and meet its power supply distance
rating requirement.
Table 27 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QB1B 1 The embedded I/O module is the first module in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating, the
1769-HSC high-speed counter module can be installed in slot 3 of the local expansion modules, as shown below.

L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC
1769-HSC Module
+V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install up to two local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 217

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Table 27 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L2 Control Systems with a 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module
Controller Cat. No. Number of Embedded 1769-HSC High-speed Counter Module Power Supply Distance Rating Calculation Impact
I/O Modules
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B 2 The embedded I/O modules are the first two modules in the module count. At its maximum power supply distance rating,
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module can be installed in slot 2 of the local expansion modules, as shown below.

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V
OUT 0UT
1 3
COM COM
V V
in in
0+ 2+
1769-HSC High-speed
00 08

01 09

02 10
I
in in
0+ 2+
I

V/I V/I
in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
Module
+ 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I
in
V/I
in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Three modules between the power supply and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module.
With this controller catalog number, you can only install one local expansion modules
between the controller and the 1769-HSC high-speed counter.

IMPORTANT When counting I/O modules to determine the 1769-HSC high-speed counter
module placement in a 1769-L24ER-QBFC1B or 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control
system, the embedded I/O module appearance is different between the
physical appearance and the modules’ appearance in the application.

The physical appearance is a shown above. The second module is two rows of
termination points below a single set of status indicators.

In the application, the second embedded I/O module appears as two modules
in the Controller Organizer each with their own slot number, that is [2] and [3].

When the 1769-HSC high-speed counter module is installed in the farthest

local expansion module slot possible, that is the fourth module in the system,
it appears with a [5] designation in the Controller Organizer, as shown below.

Modules [2] and [3] are

shown separately but are
considered a single
module when counting
modules to meet power
supply distance rating
requirements.

1769-HSC high-speed counter module is shown as module [5] in this location but considered the
fourth module when counting modules to meet power supply distance rating requirements.

For more information about the power supply distance rating for a Compact I/O
module, see CompactLogix Selection Guide, publication 1769-SG001.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Configure Local I/O Modules You can configure either of these types of local I/O modules in your
RSLogix 5000 project:
• Configure Embedded I/O Modules
• Configure Local Expansion Modules

Configure Embedded I/O Modules

Embedded I/O modules are automatically created in the I/O Configuration
portion of the Controller Organizer. Complete these steps to configure an
embedded I/O module in your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

1. Right-click the embedded I/O module and choose Properties.

2. Click the appropriate tab, make the necessary changes, and click OK.

IMPORTANT You can also use the tags to configure the CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers’
embedded I/O modules. When attempting to use the tags to make analog I/O
module selections in the input, output and configuration data arrays, the
options are complicated.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 219

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Configure Local Expansion Modules

Complete these steps to add a Compact I/O module to your

CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system and configure it.

1. Right-click the 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

220 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

3. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

Common Configuration Parameters

While the configuration options vary from module to module, there are some
common options you typically configure when using Compact I/O modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, as described in Table 28.
Table 28 - Common Configuration Parameters
Configuration Option Description
Requested packet interval (RPI) The RPI specifies the interval at which data is transmitted or received over a connection. For 1769 Compact Local I/O modules, data is
transmitted to the controller at the RPI.
When scanned on the local bus or over an EtherNet/IP network, input modules are scanned at the RPI specified in the module
configuration. Typically, you configure an RPI in milliseconds (ms). For I/O modules, the range is 0.5…750 ms.
When scanned over a DeviceNet network via a 1769-SDN scanner module in the CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system, distributed input
modules are scanned at the rate supported by the DeviceNet adapter module connecting the input modules to the network. For
example, if your system includes a remote system of 1734 POINT I/O modules on a DeviceNet network, the 1769-SDN scanner module
can only scan the distributed 1734 POINT I/O modules as quickly as the 1734-ADN DeviceNet adapter can transmit the data.
Module definition Set of configuration parameters that affect data transmission between the controller and the I/O module. The parameters include the
following:
• Series - Module’s hardware series.
• Revision - Major and minor firmware revision levels used on the module.
• Electronic keying - See page 222.
• Connection - Type of connection between the controller writing the configuration and the I/O module, such as Output.
• Data format - Type of data transferred between the controller and I/O module and what tags are generated when the configuration is
complete.
Module Fault on Controller If Connection This option determines how the controller is affected if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode. You can configure the project
Fails While in Run Mode so that a connection failure causes a major fault on the controller or not.
The default setting is for the option to be enable, that is, if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode, a major fault will occur on
the controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 221

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

I/O Connections

IMPORTANT You can only use direct connections with the local expansion modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.

A Logix5000 system uses connections to transmit I/O data, as described in

Table 29.
Table 29 - I/O Module Connections
Connection Description
Direct A direct connection is a real-time, data-transfer link between the controller and an I/O module. The controller maintains and monitors
the connection. Any break in the connection, such as a module fault, causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area
associated with the module.
Typically, analog I/O modules, diagnostic I/O modules, and specialty modules require direct connections.
Rack-optimized For digital I/O modules, you can select rack-optimized communication.
This option is used with distributed I/O modules and the Rack Optimization connection selection is made when configuring the remote
adapter. For example, if your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system includes distributed digital I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP and you
want to use a rack-optimized connection with those digital I/O modules, you must configure the distributed digital I/O modules’
EtherNet/IP adapter to use a connection type of Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection consolidates connection usage between the controller and all the digital I/O modules in a remote chassis or
on a single DIN rail. Rather than having individual, direct connections for each I/O module, there is one connection for the entire rack (or
DIN rail).

Electronic Keying The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module, as
shown in the I/O Configuration tree, to the physical module before I/O
communication begins. You can use electronic keying to help prevent
communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected.

For each module in the I/O Configuration tree, the user-selected keying option
determines if, and how, an electronic keying check is performed. Typically, three
keying options are available:
• Exact Match
• Compatible Keying
• Disable Keying

You must carefully consider the benefits and implications of each keying option
when selecting between them. For some specific module types, fewer options are
available.

222 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Electronic keying is based on a set of attributes unique to each product revision.

When a Logix5000 controller begins communicating with a module, this set of
keying attributes is considered.
Table 30 - Keying Attributes
Attribute Description
Vendor The manufacturer of the module, for example, Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley.
Product Type The general type of the module, for example, communication adapter, AC drive, or digital I/O.
Product Code The specific type of module, generally represented by its catalog number, for example,
1769-OB32.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities and data exchange formats of the module.
Typically, although not always, a later, that is higher, Major Revision supports at least all of the
data formats supported by an earlier, that is lower, Major Revision of the same catalog number
and, possibly, additional ones.
Minor Revision A number that indicates the module’s specific firmware revision. Minor Revisions typically do not
impact data compatibility but may indicate performance or behavior improvement.

You can find revision information on the General tab of a module’s Properties
dialog box.

Figure 36 - General Tab

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 223

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Exact Match

Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes, that is, Vendor, Product Type,
Product Code (catalog number), Major Revision, and Minor Revision, of the
physical module and the module created in the software to match precisely to
establish communication. If any attribute does not match precisely, I/O
communication is not permitted with the module or with modules connected
through it, as in the case of a communication module.

Use Exact Match keying when you need the system to verify that the module
revisions in use are exactly as specified in the project, such as for use in highly-
regulated industries. Exact Match keying is also necessary to enable Automatic
Firmware Update for the module via the Firmware Supervisor feature from a
Logix5000 controller.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Exact Match keying prevents I/O communication.

The module configuration is for a 1769-OB32 module with module revision 3.1.
The physical module is a 1769-OB32 module with module revision 3.2. In this
case, communication is prevented because the Minor Revision of the module
does not match precisely.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB32
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 1

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley QB1B
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Product Type = Digital Output Module

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

Catalog Number = 1769-OB32 03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14

Major Revision = 3 07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

Minor Revision = 2
00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
Communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

224 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Compatible Keying
Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or
reject communication. Different module families, communication adapters, and
module types implement the compatibility check differently based on the family
capabilities and on prior knowledge of compatible products. Release notes for
individual modules indicate the specific compatibility details.

Compatible Keying is the default setting. Compatible Keying allows the physical
module to accept the key of the module configured in the software, provided that
the configured module is one the physical module is capable of emulating. The
exact level of emulation required is product and revision specific.

With Compatible Keying, you can replace a module of a certain Major Revision
with one of the same catalog number and the same or later, that is higher, Major
Revision. In some cases, the selection makes it possible to use a replacement that
is a different catalog number than the original.

When a module is created, the module developers consider the module’s

development history to implement capabilities that emulate those of the previous
module. However, the developers cannot know future developments. Because of
this, when a system is configured, we recommend that you configure your module
using the earliest, that is, lowest, revision of the physical module that you believe
will be used in the system. By doing this, you can avoid the case of a physical
module rejecting the keying request because it is an earlier revision than the one
configured in the software.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Compatible Keying prevents I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OB32 module with module revision
3.3. The physical module is a 1769-OB32 module with module revision 3.2.
In this case, communication is prevented because the minor revision of the
module is lower than expected and may not be compatible with 3.3.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB32
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 3

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley QB1B
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Product Type = Digital Output Module 00 08

01 09
8

DC IN
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Catalog Number = 1769-OB32

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

Major Revision = 3
06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

Minor Revision = 2 00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 225

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Compatible Keying allows I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OA16 module with module revision 1.2.
The physical module is a 1769-OA16 module with module revision 3.2. In this
case, communication is allowed because the major revision of the physical
module is higher than expected and the module determines that it is
compatible with the prior major revision.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is allowed.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley QB1B
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Product Type = Digital Output Module

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

02 10

Catalog Number = 1769-OA16 03 11

04 12

05 13

06 14

Major Revision = 3 07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

Minor Revision = 2
00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

226 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Disabled Keying

Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when
attempting to communicate with a module. Other attributes, such as data size
and format, are considered and must be acceptable before I/O communication is
established. With Disabled Keying, I/O communication may occur with a
module other than the type specified in the I/O Configuration tree with
unpredictable results. We generally do not recommend using Disabled Keying.

ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying; if used

incorrectly, this option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage,
or economic loss.

If you use Disabled Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding
whether the module being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the
application.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Disable Keying prevents I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OA16 digital output module. The
physical module is a 1769-IT6 analog input module. In this case,
communication is prevented because the analog module rejects the data
formats that the digital module configuration requests.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley QB1B
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Product Type = Digital Output Module

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DC IN

00 08
01 09

Catalog Number = 1769-IT6 02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

Major Revision = 3 06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

Minor Revision = 2 +V +V

00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 227

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Disable Keying allows I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OA16 module. The physical module is a
1769-OB16 module. In this case, communication is allowed because the two
digital modules share common data formats.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is allowed.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley QB1B
L24ER
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

SOURCE
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Product Type = Digital Output Module 00 08

01 09
8

DC IN
9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Catalog Number = 1769-OB16

02 10

03 11

04 12

05 13

Major Revision = 3
06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
NC NC

+V +V

Minor Revision = 2 00 08

01 09

02 10

03 11

04 12
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13

06 14
07 15
COM COM
0 1
DC OUT

+24VDC COM FG

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

228 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
an EtherNet/IP network.
Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network IMPORTANT When adding distributed I/O modules, remember to count the remote Ethernet
adapter to remain within the maximum number of EtherNet/IP network nodes
limitation for your specific controller.
The distributed I/O modules connected to the controller via the remote
Ethernet adapter are not counted toward the maximum Ethernet node limit for
the controller.
For example, a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller supports up to 16 Ethernet
nodes. You can add up to 16 remote Ethernet adapters to the I/O Configuration
section because each remote adapter counts against the node count. However,
you can add as many remote I/O modules to the adapter’s chassis as necessary.
Remote I/O modules do not count against the node count.
For more information on node limitations, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 118.

Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on an

EtherNet/IP network.

1. Right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 229

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new Ethernet adapter as necessary and click OK.

4. Right-click the new adapter and choose New Module.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

5. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

6. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

7. Repeat these steps to add all of the desired distributed I/O modules.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control

system that uses distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.
1794-AENTR FLEX I/O Adapter 1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter
with FLEX I/O Modules with POINT I/O Modules
002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field

PanelView Plus Terminal

Power
IP ADDRESS

Computer Link 2
Activity/
Status

with Ethernet Port

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED

A1 B1 Z1
COUNTER

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via a Kinetix 350 Drive Connected via a
1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap 1783-ETAP EtherNet/IP Tap

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 231

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
a DeviceNet network.
Modules on a DeviceNet
Network Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on a
DeviceNet network.

1. If you have not done so already, install a 1769-SDN Compact I/O

DeviceNet scanner module into the local bank of your
CompactLogix 5370 L2 control system.
2. Right-click 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

3. Select the 1769-SDN scanner module and click Create.

4. Choose a Major Revision and click OK.

The New Module dialog box appears.

232 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

5. Configure the new 1769-SDN scanner module as necessary and click OK.

6. Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to define the scanlist in the

1769-SDN scanner module to communicate data between the devices and
the controller through the scanner module.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B control

system that uses distributed I/O modules on a DeviceNet network.

Computer 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Control System

with 1769-SDN Scanner Module
L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SOURCE

IN
24VDC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
QBFC1B 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
SOURCE

IN
24VDC
SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 COUNTER A1 B1 Z1

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
0 1 1 3
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

+24VDC
+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

1734-ADN POINT I/O Adapter 1606-XLDNET DeviceNet 1794-ADN FLEX I/O DeviceNet
with POINT I/O Modules Power Supply Adapter with FLEX I/O Modules

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 233

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

Monitor I/O Modules With CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, you can use the following options to
monitor I/O modules:

• Quick View Pane below the Controller Organizer

• Connection tab in the Module Properties dialog box

• Programming logic to monitor fault data so you can take

appropriate action.

When a fault occurs on an I/O module, a yellow triangle on the module’s

appearance in the Controller Organizer alerts you to the fault, as shown below.

The following graphic shows the Quick View Pane indicating the type of fault.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers Chapter 8

To see the fault description on the Connection tab in Module Properties dialog
box, complete these steps.

1. In the I/O Configuration, right-click the faulted I/O module and

choose Properties.

2. Click the Connection tab and use the fault description, in the Module
Fault section, to diagnose the issue.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and remedy the issue.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 235

Chapter 8 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L2 Controllers

End-cap Detection and Module Faults

End-cap detection is performed through the last module on a 1769 Bus. If that
module experiences a fault such that it cannot communicate on the 1769 Bus, the
following events occur:

• End-cap detection fails

• Controller faults

236 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 9

Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370

L3 Controllers

This chapter explains how to use Compact I/O modules in a CompactLogix

5370 L3 control system.

Topic Page
Select I/O Modules 237
Validate I/O Layout 242
Configure I/O 252
Electronic Keying 254
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP Network 260
Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network 263
Monitor I/O Modules 265

Select I/O Modules CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems offer these I/O module options:
• Local Expansion Modules
• Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network
• Configure Distributed I/O Modules on a DeviceNet Network

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 237

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Local Expansion Modules

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems support the use of Compact I/O

modules as local expansion modules along a CompactBus backplane.

Consider the following when using local expansion modules:

• The controllers support this many local Compact I/O modules across up
to three I/O banks, that is, the local bank and two additional banks.

Cat. No. Local Expansion Modules

Supported, max
1769- L30ER 8
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER 16
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM 30

• When possible, use specialty Compact I/O modules to meet unique

application requirements.

• Consider using a 1492 wiring system for each I/O module as an alternative
to the terminal block that comes with the module.
• Use 1492 PanelConnect™ modules and cables if you are connecting input
modules to sensors.

Install Local Expansion Modules

Complete these steps to install local expansion modules in your

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system:

1. Attach the 1769 Compact communication or I/O modules as described in

these publications:
• Compact I/O Modules Installation Instructions, publication
1769-IN088
• Compact I/O DeviceNet Scanner Module Installation Instructions,
publication 1769-IN060
2. If your system uses a local bank only, complete these steps.
a. Use the tongue-and-groove slots to attach a 1769-ECR Compact I/O
end cap terminator to the last module in the system.
b. Move the end cap terminator’s bus lever fully to the left until it clicks to
lock the end cap bus terminator.

238 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

3. If you system uses additional banks, follow these steps.

a. Install a 1769-CRx Compact I/O communication bus expansion cable
at the right end of the local bank.
b. Connect the appropriate 1769-CRx cable to the additional bank as
necessary.

That is, the expansion cable installed at the end of the local bank is
determined by how you connect to the first additional bank—on the
right or left side of the bank. See Figure 37 on page 239 for examples of
how to connect a local bank to additional banks.
c. Complete the installation of the remaining banks in your system.

IMPORTANT Make sure you install an end cap at the end of the last bank in
your system.

The following example shows example systems with local expansion

modules included.

Figure 37 - Example CompactLogix 5370 L3 Control Systems

Horizontal Orientation
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

Bank 1 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 2 1769-CRLx Cable Bank 3

Bank 1
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

1769-CRRx Cable
Vertical Orientation

Bank 2

Wire Local Expansion Modules

Wire each Compact I/O module used as a local expansion module according to
the technical documentation for that module.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 239

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Distributed I/O Modules over an EtherNet/IP Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network in your
CompactLogix 5370 control system. Consider the following when using
distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network:

• Each remote EtherNet/IP adapter included in the system must be counted

toward the controller’s maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes.

For more information on maximum number of EtherNet/IP nodes, see

Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 118.

• The configurable RPI settings vary depending on which distributed I/O

modules are used in the system.

• For information on adding distributed I/O modules to your

CompactLogix 5370 control system, see Configure Distributed I/O
Modules on a DeviceNet Network on page 263.

The following graphic shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system that uses
local expansion modules and distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP
network.

Local Expansion Modules Distributed I/O Modules

002 1734-AENTR

POINT I O
Module
Status
Network
Activity
Network
Status
Point Bus
Link 1 Status
Activity/
Status System
Power
Field
Power
IP ADDRESS

Link 2
Activity/
Status

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

240 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Distributed I/O Modules over a DeviceNet Network

You can include distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet network in your
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system. Consider the following when using
distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet network:

You must use the following to use distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet
network in your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system:

• Logix Designer application or RSLogix 5000 software - For more

information, see Configure Distributed I/O Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 260.

• RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software - For more information, see

DeviceNet Network Communication on page 131.

The following graphic shows an example 1769-L33ERM control system that uses
local expansion modules and distributed I/O modules over a DeviceNet
network.
Local Expansion Modules Distributed I/O Modules

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 241

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Validate I/O Layout After you have selected your I/O modules, you must validate the system you want
to design. Consider these points when validating I/O layout placement:
• Estimate Requested Packet Interval
• Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates
• Calculate System Power Consumption
• Power Supply Distance Rating
• Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Estimate Requested Packet Interval

The requested packet interval (RPI) defines the frequency at which the
controller sends data to and receives data from I/O modules. You set an RPI rate
for each I/O module in your system.

The CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers always attempt to scan an I/O module

at the configured RPI rate. For individual I/O modules, a Module RPI Overlap
minor fault occurs if there is at least one I/O module which cannot be serviced
within its RPI time.

The specific configuration parameters for a system determine the impact on

actual RPI rates. These configuration factors can impact the effective scan
frequency for any individual module:
• Rates at which other Compact I/O modules’ RPI rates are set
• Number of other Compact I/O modules in the system
• Types of other Compact I/O modules in the system
• Application user task priorities

Table 31 describes RPI rate guidelines.

Table 31 - Requested Packet Interval Guidelines
Type of Module Guidelines
Digital and analog (any The following guidelines apply:
mix) • 1…2 modules can be scanned in 0.5 ms.
• 3…4 modules can be scanned in 1 ms.
• 5…30 modules can be scanned in 2 ms.
• Some input modules have a fixed 8 ms filter, so selecting a faster RPI has no effect.
Specialty The following conditions apply:
• For every full-sized 1769-SDN module in the system, increase every other module's RPI
by 2 ms.
• For every 1769-HSC module in the system, increase every other module's RPI by 1 ms.
• For every full-sized 1769-ASCII module system, increase every other module's RPI by
1 ms.
• For every 1769-SM2 module in the system, increase every other module's RPI by 2 ms.
For example, if there are four digital I/O modules in the system configured with an
RPI = 1 ms and a 1769-SDN module is added to the system, you should increase the RPI
value for all four digital I/O modules by 2 ms. Therefore, when the 1769-SDN module is
added to the system the four digital I/O modules should use an RPI = 3 ms.
If, in the same system, you add a second 1769-SDN module, the four digital I/O modules’ RPI
value should be increased to 5 ms.

242 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

You can set individual Compact I/O modules’ RPI rates higher than those listed
in Table 31. The RPI shows how quickly modules can be scanned, not how
quickly an application can use the data. The RPI is asynchronous to the program
scan. Other factors, such as program execution duration, affect I/O throughput.

Module Fault Related to RPI Estimates

When following the guidelines described in Table 31, most CompactLogix 5370
L3 control systems operate as expected. Some systems that follow the guidelines
may experience a Module RPI Overlap minor fault as described in the
following table.
Name Fault Condition In Which Fault Occurs
Information
Module (Type 03) I/O fault This fault is logged when an I/O module's current RPI update overlaps with its
RPI (Code 94) Module previous RPI update. The Minor Faults tab in the Controller Properties dialog box
Overlap RPI overlap indicates which module's RPI is overlapping.
detected If multiple I/O modules experience the fault, the application indicates the fault
Module Slot = x, occurred on the first such I/O module. Typically, it is an I/O module with a large
where x is the slot Input/Output array sizes. Example modules that use large Input/Output array sizes
number of the I/O include the 1769-SDN and 1769-HSC modules. In these cases, we recommend you
module in the I/O adjust the module’s RPI to eliminate the fault.
Configuration Once the fault is cleared from the first I/O module, the application indicates the
section next module experiencing the fault.This pattern continues until the fault is cleared
from all affected I/O modules.
To avoid this fault, set the I/O modules’ RPI rate to higher numerical values. We
recommend you use an RPI value that is not a common multiple of other module
RPI values, such as 2.5 ms, 5.5 ms or 7 ms.
• We recommend you do not run CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems with
Module RPI Overlap faults.
• A system that experiences many Module RPI Overlap faults may not operate
optimally because I/O data is not sampled at the expected rate determined by
RPI settings.
• When the project is downloaded or an I/O module’s RPI value is adjusted, it is
expected to have a minor fault. Faults under these conditions are transitionary.
Clear the fault and wait for the fault to reappear before adjusting the RPI value
or the task priorities.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 243

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Calculate System Power Consumption

The 1769 Compact I/O power supplies provide power to CompactLogix local
and additional banks. The power provided is measured in current capacity.

Consider these points when designing your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control

system banks:‘

• 1769 Compact I/O power supplies have two maximum current capacity
requirements that affect how you design and configure a single bank.

The following are the maximum current capacity requirements:

– Maximum current capacity for a single bank
– Maximum current capacity for each side of the power supply

Current Capacity for Single Bank

Current Capacity for Side of Bank Current Capacity for Side of Bank

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

• The maximum current capacity requirements vary by the power supply

used in the bank.

Power Supply Current Capacity, max for Single Bank Current Capacity, max for Each Side of
Cat. No. Bank(1)
1769-PA2
2 A at 5V DC and 0.8 A at 24V DC 1 A at 5V DC and 0.4 A at 24V DC
1769-PB2
1769-PA4
4 A at 5V DC and 2 A at 24V DC 2 A at 5V DC and 1 A at 24V DC
1769-PB4
(1) Specification for banks with devices on both left and right sides of the power supply.

244 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Calculate Power Consumption in Single Bank

IMPORTANT A single bank, requires the CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers to reside in the
leftmost slot. At minimum, you must calculate the controller’s power
consumption on the left side of the power supply.
If additional modules are exist on the left side of the power supply, you must
calculate the power consumption for those modules as well.
If additional modules are installed to the right of the power supply, you must
calculate the power consumption for that side separately.

Use this table to calculate power consumption in a single bank.

Table 32 - Module Power Consumption Calculation for a Local Bank

Side of Power Device Cat. No. Number of Module Current Requirements Calculated Current =
Supply Modules(3) (Number of Modules) x (Module
Current Requirements)
at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA) at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA)
1769-L30ER 1 500 225 500 225
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
Left - Required
1769-L33ER
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM
Left - Optional I/O Module-specific Up to 3 Module-specific Module-specific
Total Current Required(2):

Right I/O Module-specific Up to 8 Module-specific Module-specific

IMPORTANT: Insert a separate row in this
calculation for each I/O module.
Total Current Required(2):

Total Current Required for Single Bank if Modules Are Installed on Both Sides of the Power Supply(1):
(1) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for the bank.

(2) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for this side of the bank.

(3) In the local bank, you can only install up to three modules to the left of the power supply because the CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers have a power supply distance rating of four and must be within
four slots of the Compact I/O power supply. On the right side of the power supply in the local bank and both sides of the power supply in additional banks, you can install up to eight modules if power
supply distance ratings for the modules validate the system design.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 245

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Calculate Power Consumption in an Additional Bank

IMPORTANT In additional banks, you can install I/O modules to the left side, right side or
both sides of the power supply.
The system design determines how to use the table below.

Use this table to calculate power consumption in an additional bank.

Table 33 - Module Power Consumption Calculation for an Additional Bank

Side of Power Device Cat. No. Number of Module Current Requirements Calculated Current =
Supply Modules(3) (Number of Modules) x (Module
Current Requirements)
at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA) at 5V DC (in mA) at 24V DC (in mA)
Left - Optional in I/O Modules Up to 8 Module-specific Module-specific
an additional bank IMPORTANT: Insert a separate row in this
calculation for each I/O module.
Total Current Required(2):

Right - Optional in I/O Modules Up to 8 Module-specific Module-specific

a single bank IMPORTANT: Insert a separate row for each I/O
module.
Total Current Required(2):

Total Current Required for Bank if Modules Are Installed on Both Sides of the Power Supply(1):
(1) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for the bank.
(2) This number must not exceed the power supply current capacity for this side of the bank.

(3) You can install up to eight modules in additional banks if the power supply distance ratings for the modules validate the system design.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Physical Placement of I/O Modules

Depending on the controller catalog number, CompactLogix 5370 L3

controllers support between eight and thirty I/O modules. For more information
on specific catalog numbers, see Local Expansion Modules on page 238.

Consider these factors when determining the physical placement of the

I/O modules:

• You can install I/O modules in local and additional banks.

• You can install I/O modules to the left and right of the power supply.

• When a system requires more than one bank, you can install the additional
banks horizontally or vertically, as shown in this graphic.

Horizontal Orientation
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

Local Bank Additional Bank Additional Bank

1769-CRL1 Compact I/O Communication

Bus Expansion Cables

Local Bank
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

1769-CRR1 Compact I/O Communication

Vertical Orientation
Bus Expansion Cables

Additional Bank

• Each I/O module also has a power supply distance rating and specific
maximum current draw. Considered jointly, distance ratings and current
draw determine where I/O modules can be placed in a bank and what
configuration of modules may be installed in the bank.

For more information on power supply distance ratings, see Power Supply
Distance Rating on page 69. For more information on system power
consumption, see Calculate System Power Consumption on page 244.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 247

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Local Bank

To validate the local bank design, confirm the design meets these requirements:

• The controller is the leftmost device in the local bank.

• No more than three modules are installed between the controller and the
left side of the power supply.

• No more than eight modules are installed to the right of the power supply.

• The modules’ power consumption on each side of the power supply does
not exceed the power supply’s capacity for that side.

• The total power consumption by all modules in the bank does not exceed
the power supply’s capacity for the entire bank.

• Modules are installed such that all power supply distance rating and system
power consumption requirements are met.

For example, the 1769-SDN scanner module has a power supply distance
rating of four. If the design includes the installation of a 1769-SDN
scanner with greater than three modules between it and the power supply,
the design is invalid.

IMPORTANT With respect to power supply distance ratings, if you install a module that
violates its power supply distance rating specification, the system may appear
to operate normally for a period of time but could experience operational
issues over time, such as I/O faults.

The example graphic below shows a local bank.

1769 Compact I/O
Power Supply

1769-L33ER Controller End Cap

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

Compact I/O Modules Compact I/O Modules

248 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Additional Banks

If your application calls for twelve or more I/O modules, at minimum, you must
install the modules in multiple banks additional banks. The number of additional
banks is determined by the specific conditions of each application.

Once the local bank design is validated, you must validate the design for any
additional banks. To validate additional bank designs, confirm the design meets
these requirements:

• Compact I/O communication bus expansion cables are used properly.

TIP Compact I/O expansion cables have the same dimensions as the end
caps regardless of whether they are installed at the right or left side of
the communication bus.

• No more than eight modules are installed on either side of the power
supply.

• The modules’ power consumption on each side of the power supply does
not exceed the power supply’s capacity for that side.

• Modules are installed such that all power supply distance rating
requirements are met.

• End caps are installed properly, as shown below.

Local Bank

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

1769-CRRx Cables

Additional Bank

End Cap

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 249

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Power Supply Distance Rating

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems do not have embedded I/O modules.

You begin counting local expansion slots with the first Compact I/O module
installed next to the power supply when determining where to install a Compact
I/O module and meet its power supply distance rating.

In CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, you can install Compact I/O

modules to the left or right side of the power supply. You can also use both local
and additional banks in CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems, with each
allowing the inclusion of Compact I/O modules.

Local Bank

In the local bank, the controller must be the leftmost device in the system and
you can only install up to three modules between the controller and the power
supply. Therefore, any Compact I/O modules that are installed to the left of the
power supply in the local bank, are in a module slot that meets the module’s
power supply distance rating requirements.

Additional Banks

CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems also support the use of additional banks
for the system’s local expansion modules. Every additional bank requires a 1769
Compact I/O power supply. The bank can be designed with local expansion
modules on either side of the power supply.

Most Compact I/O modules have power supply distance rating values that allow
you to install them in any slot on either side of the power supply in additional
banks. Some Compact I/O modules have power supply distance ratings that
affect where you can install them in the CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system.

For example, the 1769-ASCII Compact ASCII and 1769-HSC Compact

high-speed counter modules each have a power supply distance rating of four.
These modules can be installed in local expansion module slots one
through three.

250 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

In this case, you must install the 1769-ASCII module and 1769-HSC high-speed
counter module with no more three Compact I/O modules between the module
and the power, regardless of whether the modules are installed to the left or right
of the power supply.

This graphic shows 1769-HSC high-speed counter modules installed in a

1769-L36ERM control system and meeting the module’s power supply
distance rating.

1769-HSC Module 1769-HSC Module

Local Bank

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

1769-HSC High-speed Counter Modules Installed in a 1769-L36ERM Control System

Meeting the High-speed Counter Module’s Power Supply Distance Rating Requirements

Additional Bank

1769-HSC Module 1769-HSC Module

IMPORTANT The previous table shows example systems with 1769-HSC high-speed counter
modules in each control system because it has a power supply distance rating
of four and cannot be installed as far from the Compact I/O power supply. Most
Compact I/O modules have power supply distance ratings that allow you to
install them anywhere in the local expansion slots of a CompactLogix 5370 L2
control system.
For more information about the power supply distance rating for a Compact I/O
module, see CompactLogix Selection Guide, publication 1769-SG001.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 251

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Configure I/O Complete these steps to add a Compact I/O module to your
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system and configure it.

1. Right-click the 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

252 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Common Configuration Parameters

While the configuration options vary from module to module, there are some
common options you typically configure when using Compact I/O modules in a
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system, as described in Table 34.
Table 34 - Common Configuration Parameters
Configuration Option Description
Requested packet interval (RPI) The RPI specifies the interval at which data is transmitted or received over a connection. For 1769 Compact Local I/O modules, data is
transmitted to the controller at the RPI.
When scanned on the local bus or over an EtherNet/IP network, input modules are scanned at the RPI specified in the module
configuration. Typically, you configure an RPI in milliseconds (ms). For I/O modules, the range is 0.5…750 ms.
When scanned over a DeviceNet network, distributed input modules are scanned at the rate supported by the DeviceNet adapter module
connecting the input modules to the network. For example, the scan rate for distributed 1734 POINT I/O over DeviceNet can occur only as
quickly as the 1734-ADN DeviceNet adapter can transmit the data.
Module definition Set of configuration parameters that affect data transmission between the controller and the I/O module. The parameters include the
following:
• Series - Module’s hardware series.
• Revision - Major and minor firmware revision levels used on the module.
• Electronic keying - See page 254.
• Connection - Type of connection between the controller writing the configuration and the I/O module, such as Output.
• Data format - Type of data transferred between the controller and I/O module and what tags are generated when the configuration is
complete.
Module Fault on Controller If Connection This option determines how the controller is affected if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode. You can configure the project
Fails While in Run Mode so that a connection failure causes a major fault on the controller or not.
The default setting is for the option to be enable, that is, if the connection to an I/O module fails in Run mode, a major fault will occur on
the controller.

I/O Connections

A Logix5000 system uses connections to transmit I/O data, as described in

Table 35.
Table 35 - I/O Module Connections
Connection Description
Direct A direct connection is a real-time, data-transfer link between the controller and an I/O module. The controller maintains and monitors
the connection. Any break in the connection, such as a module fault, causes the controller to set fault status bits in the data area
associated with the module.
Typically, analog I/O modules, diagnostic I/O modules, and specialty modules require direct connections.
Rack-optimized For digital I/O modules, you can select rack-optimized communication.
This option is used with distributed I/O modules and the Rack Optimization connection selection is made when configuring the remote
adapter. For example, if you want to use a rack-optimized connection with digital I/O modules in a remote 1734 POINT I/O system, you
configure the 1734-AENT(R) module to use a connection type of Rack Optimization.
A rack-optimized connection consolidates connection usage between the controller and all the digital I/O modules in a remote chassis or
on a single DIN rail. Rather than having individual, direct connections for each I/O module, there is one connection for the entire rack (or
DIN rail).

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 253

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Electronic Keying The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module, as
shown in the I/O Configuration tree, to the physical module before I/O
communication begins. You can use electronic keying to help prevent
communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected.

For each module in the I/O Configuration tree, the user-selected keying option
determines if, and how, an electronic keying check is performed. Typically, three
keying options are available:
• Exact Match
• Compatible Keying
• Disable Keying

You must carefully consider the benefits and implications of each keying option
when selecting between them. For some specific module types, fewer options are
available.

Electronic keying is based on a set of attributes unique to each product revision.

When a Logix5000 controller begins communicating with a module, this set of
keying attributes is considered.
Table 36 - Keying Attributes
Attribute Description
Vendor The manufacturer of the module, for example, Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley.
Product Type The general type of the module, for example, communication adapter, AC drive, or digital I/O.
Product Code The specific type of module, generally represented by its catalog number, for example, 1769-
OB32.
Major Revision A number that represents the functional capabilities and data exchange formats of the module.
Typically, although not always, a later, that is higher, Major Revision supports at least all of the
data formats supported by an earlier, that is lower, Major Revision of the same catalog number
and, possibly, additional ones.
Minor Revision A number that indicates the module’s specific firmware revision. Minor Revisions typically do not
impact data compatibility but may indicate performance or behavior improvement.

You can find revision information on the General tab of a module’s Properties
dialog box.

Figure 38 - General Tab

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

254 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Exact Match

Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes, that is, Vendor, Product Type,
Product Code (catalog number), Major Revision, and Minor Revision, of the
physical module and the module created in the software to match precisely to
establish communication. If any attribute does not match precisely, I/O
communication is not permitted with the module or with modules connected
through it, as in the case of a communication module.

Use Exact Match keying when you need the system to verify that the module
revisions in use are exactly as specified in the project, such as for use in highly-
regulated industries. Exact Match keying is also necessary to enable Automatic
Firmware Update for the module via the Firmware Supervisor feature from a
Logix5000 controller.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Exact Match keying prevents I/O communication.

The module configuration is for a 1769-OB32 module with module revision 3.1.
The physical module is a 1769-OB32 module with module revision 3.2. In this
case, communication is prevented because the Minor Revision of the module
does not match precisely.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB32
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 1

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB32
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
Communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 255

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Compatible Keying
Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or
reject communication. Different module families, communication adapters, and
module types implement the compatibility check differently based on the family
capabilities and on prior knowledge of compatible products. Release notes for
individual modules indicate the specific compatibility details.

Compatible Keying is the default setting. Compatible Keying allows the physical
module to accept the key of the module configured in the software, provided that
the configured module is one the physical module is capable of emulating. The
exact level of emulation required is product and revision specific.

With Compatible Keying, you can replace a module of a certain Major Revision
with one of the same catalog number and the same or later, that is higher, Major
Revision. In some cases, the selection makes it possible to use a replacement that
is a different catalog number than the original.

When a module is created, the module developers consider the module’s

development history to implement capabilities that emulate those of the previous
module. However, the developers cannot know future developments. Because of
this, when a system is configured, we recommend that you configure your module
using the earliest, that is, lowest, revision of the physical module that you believe
will be used in the system. By doing this, you can avoid the case of a physical
module rejecting the keying request because it is an earlier revision than the one
configured in the software.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Compatible Keying prevents I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OB32 module with module revision
3.3. The physical module is a 1769-OB32 module with module revision 3.2.
In this case, communication is prevented because the minor revision of the
module is lower than expected and may not be compatible with 3.3.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB32
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 3

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB32
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

256 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Compatible Keying allows I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OA16 module with module revision 1.2.
The physical module is a 1769-OA16 module with module revision 3.2. In this
case, communication is allowed because the major revision of the physical
module is higher than expected and the module determines that it is
compatible with the prior major revision.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is allowed.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 257

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Disabled Keying

Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when
attempting to communicate with a module. Other attributes, such as data size
and format, are considered and must be acceptable before I/O communication is
established. With Disabled Keying, I/O communication may occur with a
module other than the type specified in the I/O Configuration tree with
unpredictable results. We generally do not recommend using Disabled Keying.

ATTENTION: Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying; if used

incorrectly, this option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage,
or economic loss.

If you use Disabled Keying, you must take full responsibility for understanding
whether the module being used can fulfill the functional requirements of the
application.

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Disable Keying prevents I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OA16 digital output module. The
physical module is a 1769-IT6 analog input module. In this case,
communication is prevented because the analog module rejects the data
formats that the digital module configuration requests.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is prevented.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-IT6
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

258 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

EXAMPLE In this scenario, Disable Keying allows I/O communication:

The module configuration is for a 1769-OA16 module. The physical module is a
1769-OB16 module. In this case, communication is allowed because the two
digital modules share common data formats.
Module Configuration
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OA16
Major Revision = 1
Minor Revision = 2

Communication is allowed.

Physical Module
Vendor = Allen-Bradley
Product Type = Digital Output Module
Catalog Number = 1769-OB16
Major Revision = 3
Minor Revision = 2
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

IMPORTANT Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O
communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a
loss of data.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 259

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
an EtherNet/IP network.
Modules on an EtherNet/IP
Network IMPORTANT When adding distributed I/O modules, remember to count the remote Ethernet
adapter to remain within the maximum number of EtherNet/IP network nodes
limitation for your specific controller.
The remote I/O modules connected to the controller via the Ethernet adapter
are not counted toward the maximum Ethernet node limit for the controller.
For more information on node limitations, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 118.

Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on an

EtherNet/IP network.

1. Right-click Ethernet and choose New Module.

2. Select the desired Ethernet adapter and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

260 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

3. Configure the new Ethernet adapter as necessary and click OK.

4. Right-click the new adapter and choose New Module.

5. Select the desired I/O module and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 261

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

6. Configure the new I/O module as necessary and click OK.

7. Repeat these steps to add all the desired distributed I/O modules.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L33ERM control system that uses

distributed I/O modules over an EtherNet/IP network.

1734-AENTR POINT I/O Adapter 1769-L33ERM

with POINT I/O Modules Control System

Computer 00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

LINK 1 LINK 2

PanelView Plus Terminal

with Ethernet Port

1794-AENTR FLEX I/O EtherNet/IP 1732E-IB16M12R ArmorBlock

Adapter with FLEX I/O Modules EtherNet/IP Module

262 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Configure Distributed I/O Your CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system can use distributed I/O modules on
a DeviceNet network.
Modules on a DeviceNet
Network Complete these steps to configure distributed I/O modules on a
DeviceNet network.

1. If you have not done so already, install a 1769-SDN Compact I/O

DeviceNet scanner module into the local bank of your
CompactLogix CompactLogix 5370 L3 control system.
2. Right-click 1769 Bus and choose New Module.

3. Select the 1769-SDN scanner module and click Create.

4. Choose a Major Revision and click OK.

The New Module dialog box appears.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 263

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

5. Configure the new 1769-SDN scanner module as necessary and click OK.

6. Use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to define the scanlist in the

1769-SDN scanner module to communicate data between the devices and
the controller through the scanner module.

The following graphic is an example of a 1769-L33ERM control system that uses

distributed I/O modules on a DeviceNet network.

Computer 1769-L33ERM Control System with

1769-SDN Scanner Module

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
(Front)
2 (Rear)

Adapter
Status

DeviceNet
Status

PointBus
Status

1734-ADN

System
Power
DeviceNet
Power

1734-ADN POINT I/O Adapter 1606-XLDNET DeviceNet 1794-ADN FLEX I/O DeviceNet
with POINT I/O Modules Power Supply Adapter with FLEX I/O Modules

264 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers Chapter 9

Monitor I/O Modules With CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers, you can monitor I/O modules in the
following ways:

• Quick View Pane below the Controller Organizer

• Connection tab in the Module Properties dialog box

• Programming logic to monitor fault data so you can take

appropriate action.

When a fault occurs on an I/O module, a yellow triangle on the module’s

appearance in the Controller Organizer alerts you to the fault.

The following graphic shows the Quick View Pane indicating the type of fault.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 265

Chapter 9 Use I/O Modules with CompactLogix 5370 L3 Controllers

To see the fault description on the Connection tab in Module Properties dialog
box, complete these steps.

1. In the I/O Configuration, right-click the faulted I/O module and

choose Properties.

2. Click the Connection tab and use the fault description, in the Module
Fault section, to diagnose the issue.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box and remedy the issue.

End-cap Detection and Module Faults

End-cap detection is performed through the last module on a 1769 Bus. If that
module experiences a fault such that it cannot communicate on the 1769 Bus, the
following events occur:

• End-cap detection fails

• Controller faults

266 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 10

Develop Applications

Topic Page
Elements of a Control Application 267
Tasks 268
Programs 272
Routines 274
Tags 275
Programming Languages 278
Add-On Instructions 279
Monitoring Controller Status 280
Monitoring I/O Connections 281
System Overhead Time Slice 284
Additional Resources 287

Elements of a Control A control application is comprised of several elements that require planning for
efficient application execution. Application elements include the following:
Application
• Tasks
• Programs
• Routines
• Tags

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 267

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Figure 39 - Elements of a Control Program

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1
Configuration

Status

Watchdog
Program 100

Program 1
Program
Main Routine (local) Tags

Fault Routine

Other
Routines

Controller (global)
Tags I/O Data System-shared Data

Tasks A Logix5000 controller lets you use multiple tasks to schedule and prioritize the
execution of your programs based on specific criteria. This multitasking allocates
the controller’s processing time among the different operations in your
application:
• The controller executes only one task at a time.
• One task can interrupt another’s execution and take control.
• In any given task, multiple programs may be used. However, only one
program executes at a time.

268 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Figure 40 - Task in a Control Application

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1 Task 1
Contains the following: Configuration
• Configuration Data
Status
• Status Data
• Watchdog Data Watchdog
• Programs Program 100

Program 1
Program
Main Routine (local) Tags

Fault Routine

Other Routines

Controller (global)
I/O Data System-shared Data
Tags

Figure 41 - Tasks in Application

Main Task
(continuous)

Task 2
(periodic)

Task 3
(event)

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 269

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

A task provides scheduling and priority information for a set of one or more
programs. Configure tasks as continuous, periodic, or event by using the Task
Properties dialog box.

Figure 42 - Configuring the Task Type

This table explains the types of tasks you can configure.

Table 37 - Task Types and Execution Frequency

Task Type Task Execution Description
Continuous All of the time The continuous task runs in the background. Any CPU time not allocated to other operations (such as motion,
communication, and other tasks) is used to execute the programs in the continuous task:
• The continuous task runs constantly. When the continuous task completes a full scan, it restarts immediately.
• A project does not require a continuous task. If used, there can be only one continuous task.
Periodic • At a set interval, such as every A periodic task performs a function at a specific interval:
100 ms • Whenever the time for the periodic task expires, the task interrupts any lower priority tasks, executes once, and then
• Multiple times in the scan of returns control to where the previous task left off.
your other logic • You can configure the time period from 0.1...2,000,000.00 ms. The default is 10 ms. It is also controller and configuration
dependent.
• The performance of a periodic task depends on the type of Logix5000 controller and on the logic in the task.
• The periodic task processes I/O data for CompactLogix, FlexLogix, DriveLogix, and SoftLogix controllers with the following
considerations:
– For CompactLogix, FlexLogix, and DriveLogix controllers, operates at priority 6
– For SoftLogix controllers, operates at Windows priority 16 (Idle)
– Higher-priority tasks take precedence over the I/O task and can impact processing
– Executes at the fastest RPI you have scheduled for the system
– Executes for as long as it takes to scan the configured I/O modules
Event Immediately when an event occurs An Event task performs a function only when a specific event (trigger) occurs. The trigger for the Event task can be
the following:
• A consumed tag trigger
• An EVENT instruction
• An axis trigger
• A motion event trigger
• Module input data state change
IMPORTANT: With Logix Designer application, version 21.00.00 or later, you can use this trigger with 1756 ControlLogix,
1789 SoftLogix, and CompactLogix 5370 L1 applications.

270 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

The CompactLogix controller supports up to 32 tasks, only one of which can be

continuous.

A task can have up to 100 separate Programs per task, each with its own
executable routines and program-scoped tags. Once a task is triggered (activated),
all of the programs assigned to the task execute in the order in which they are
grouped. Programs can appear only once in the Controller Organizer and cannot
be shared by multiple tasks.

Task Priority

Each task in the controller has a priority level. The operating system uses the
priority level to determine which task to execute when multiple tasks are
triggered. A higher priority task will interrupt any lower priority task. The
continuous task has the lowest priority and is always interrupted by a periodic or
event task.

You can configure periodic tasks to execute from the lowest priority of 15 up to
the highest priority of 1. Configure the task priority using the Task Properties
dialog box.

Figure 43 - Configure Task Priority

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 271

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Programs The controller operating system is a preemptive multitasking system that is IEC
1131-3 compliant. This system provides the following:
• Programs to group data and logic
• Routines to encapsulate executable code written in a single programming
language

Each program contains the following:

• Program tags
• A main executable routine
• Other routines
• An optional fault routine

Figure 44 - Program in a Control Application

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1
Configuration

Status

Watchdog
Program 100

Program 1
Program 1
Program (local)
Contains the following:
Main Routine Tags
• Main Routine
• Fault Routine
• Other Routines Fault Routine
• Program Tags

Other Routines

Controller (global) Tags I/O Data System-shared Data

Figure 45 - Programs in Application

Program

Program

272 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Scheduled and Unscheduled Programs

The scheduled programs in a task execute to completion from first to last.

Programs that aren’t attached to any task show up as unscheduled programs.

Unscheduled programs in a task are downloaded to the controller with the entire
project. The controller verifies unscheduled programs but does not execute them.

You must schedule a program in a task before the controller can scan the
program. To schedule an unscheduled program, use the Program/Phase Schedule
tab of the Task Properties dialog box.

Figure 46 - Scheduling an Unscheduled Program

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 273

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Routines A routine is a set of logic instructions in a single programming language, such as

Ladder Diagram (ladder logic). Routines provide the executable code for the
project in a controller. A routine is similar to a program file or subroutine in a
PLC or SLC processor.™
Each program has a main routine. This is the first routine to execute when the
controller triggers the associated task and calls the associated program. Use logic,
such as the Jump to Subroutine ( JSR) instruction, to call other routines.

You can also specify an optional program fault routine. The controller executes
this routine if it encounters an instruction-execution fault in any of the routines
in the associated program.

Figure 47 - Routines in a Control Application

Control Application

Controller Fault Handler

Task 32

Task 1
Configuration

Status

Watchdog
Program 100

Program 1
Program (local)
Main Routine Tags

Fault Routine

Other Routines

Controller (global)
Tags I/O Data System-shared Data

Figure 48 - Routines in Application

Routine

Routine

274 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Tags With a Logix5000 controller, you use a tag (alphanumeric name) to address data
(variables). In Logix5000 controllers, there is no fixed, numeric format. For
example, as shown below, you can use the tag name north_tank_mix instead of a
numeric format, such as N7:0.0.

The tag name itself identifies the data. This lets you do the following:
• Organize your data to mirror your machinery.
• Document your application as you develop it.

This example shows data tags created in the scope of the Main Program of the
controller.

Figure 49 - Tags Example

Controller Organizer - Main Program Tags

Program Tags Window - Main Program Tags

Analog I/O Device

Integer Value
Storage Bit
Counter
Timer
Digital I/O Device

There are several guidelines for creating and configuring program tags for
optimal task and program execution. For more information, see the Logix5000
Controllers and I/O Tag Data Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM004.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 275

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Extended Properties

The Extended Properties feature lets you define additional information, such as
limits, engineering units, or state identifiers, for various components within your
controller project.
Component Extended Properties
Tag In the Tag Editor, add extended properties to a tag.
User-defined data type In the Data Type Editor, add extended properties to data types.
Add-On Instructions In the properties associated with the Add-On Instruction definition, add
extended properties to Add-On Instructions.

Pass-through behavior is the ability to assign extended properties at a higher level

of a structure or Add-On Instruction and have that extended property
automatically available for all members. Pass-through behavior is available for
descriptions, state identifiers, and engineering units and is user configurable.
Configure pass-through behavior on the Project tab of the Controller Properties
dialog box. If you choose not to show pass-through properties, then only
extended properties that have been configured for a given component are
displayed.

Pass-through behavior is not available for limits. When an instance of a tag is

created, if limits are associated with the data type, the instance is copied.

You need to know which tags have limits associated with them as there is no
indication in the tag browser that extended properties are defined for a tag. If,
however, you try to use extended properties that have not been defined for a tag,
the editors show a visual indication and the routine does not verify.

Access Extended Properties in Logic

You can access limits defined on tags by using the .@Min and .@Max syntax:
• You cannot write to extended properties values in logic.
• To use extended tag properties in an Add-On Instruction, you must pass
them in as input operands to the Add-On Instruction.
• Aliases to tags that have extended properties cannot access the extended
properties in logic.
• Limits can be configured for input and output parameters in Add-On
Instructions. However, limits cannot be defined on an InOut parameter of
an Add-On Instruction.
• Limits cannot be accessed inside Add-On Instruction logic. Limits are for
use by HMI applications only.

276 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

If an array tag is using indirect addressing to access limits in logic, the following
conditions apply:
• If the array tag has limits configured, the extended properties are applied to
any array element that does not explicitly have that particular extended
property configured. For example, if the array tag MyArray has Max
configured to 100, then any element of the array that does not have Max
configured inherits the value of 100 when being used in logic. However, it
will not be visible to you that the value inherited from MyArray is
configured in the tag properties.
• At least one array element must have a limit configured for indirectly
referenced array logic to verify. For example, if MyArray[x].@Max is being
used in logic, at least one array element of MyArray[] must have Max
extended property configured if Max is not configured by MyArray.
• Under the following circumstances a data type default value is used:
– Array is accessed programmatically with indirect reference.
– Array tag does not have the extended property configured.
– A member of an array does not have the extended property configured.

For example, for an array of SINT type, when max limit is called in logic
for a member, the value 127 will be used.

If an array element is directly accessed, the element has to have the extended
property defined. If not, verification will fail.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 277

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Programming Languages The CompactLogix controller supports these programming languages, both
online and offline.

Table 38 - CompactLogix Controller Programming Languages

Language Is best-used in programs with
Relay ladder Continuous or parallel execution of multiple operations (not sequenced)
Boolean or bit-based operations
Complex logical operations
Message and communication processing
Machine interlocking
Operations that service or maintenance personnel may have to interpret in
order to troubleshoot the machine or process
Function block diagram Continuous process and drive control
Loop control
Calculations in circuit flow
Sequential function chart (SFC) High-level management of multiple operations
Repetitive sequence of operations
Batch process
Motion control using structured text
State machine operations
Structured text Complex mathematical operations
Specialized array or table loop processing
ASCII string handling or protocol processing

For information about programming in these languages, see the Logix5000

Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM001.

278 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Add-On Instructions You can design and configure sets of commonly used instructions to increase
project consistency. Similar to the built-in instructions contained in Logix5000
controllers, these instructions you create are called Add-On Instructions.
Add-On Instructions reuse common control algorithms. With them, you can do
the following:
• Ease maintenance by animating logic for a single instance.
• Protect intellectual property with Source Protection.
• Reduce documentation development time.

You can use Add-On Instructions across multiple projects. You can define your
instructions, obtain them from somebody else, or copy them from another
project.

This table explains some of the capabilities and advantages of use Add-On
Instructions.

Table 39 - Add-On Instruction Capabilities

Capability Description
Save Time With Add-On Instructions, you can combine your most commonly used logic into sets of reusable instructions. You save time when you
create instructions for your projects and then share them with others. Add-On Instructions increase project consistency because
commonly used algorithms all work in the same manner, regardless of who implements the project.
Use Standard Editors You create Add-On Instructions by using one of three editors:
• Relay Ladder
• Function Block Diagram
• Structured Text
Once you have created instructions, you can use them in any editor.
Export Add-On Instructions You can export Add-On Instructions to other projects as well as copy and paste them from one project to another. Give each instruction
a unique name so that you don’t accidentally overwrite another instruction of the same name.
Use Context Views Context views let you visualize an instruction’s logic for a specific instant, simplifying online troubleshooting of your Add-On
Instructions. Each instruction contains a revision, a change history, and an auto-generated help page.
Create Custom Help When you create an instruction, you enter information for the description fields in dialogs, information that becomes what is known as
Custom Help. Custom Help makes it easier for you to get the help you need when implementing the instructions.
Apply Source Protection As the creator of Add-On Instructions, you can limit users of your instructions to read-only access, or you can bar access to the internal
logic or local parameters used by the instructions. This source protection lets you prevent unwanted changes to your instructions and
protects your intellectual property.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 279

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Once defined in a project, Add-On Instructions behave similarly to the built-in

instructions in Logix5000 controllers. They appear on the instruction tool bar
for easy access, as do internal instructions.

Figure 50 - Add-On Instructions

Controller Organizer Instruction Toolbar

For more information about using Add-On Instructions, see the

Add-On Instructions Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM010.

Monitoring Controller Status The CompactLogix controller uses Get System Value (GSV) and Set System
Value (SSV) instructions to get and set (change) controller data. The controller
®
stores system data in objects. There is no status file, as in the PLC-5 processor.

The GSV instruction retrieves the specified information and places it in the
destination. The SSV instruction sets the specified attribute with data from the
source. Both instructions are available from the Input/Output tab of the
Instruction tool bar.

Figure 51 - GSV and SSV Instructions for Monitoring

280 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

When you add a GSV/SSV instruction to the program, the valid object classes,
object names, and attribute names for each instruction are displayed. For the
GSV instruction, you can get values for all the available attributes. For the SSV
instruction, only those attributes you are allowed to set are displayed.

Some object types appear repeatedly, so you may have to specify the object name.
For example, there can be several tasks in your application. Each task has its own
Task object that you access by the task name.

There are several objects and attributes that you can use the GSV and SSV
instructions to monitor and set the system. For more information about GSV
instructions, SSV instructions, objects, and attributes see the Logix5000
Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003.

Monitoring I/O Connections If communication with a device in the controller’s I/O configuration does not
occur in an application-specific period of time, the communication times out and
the controller produces warnings.

The minimum timeout period that, once expired without communication, causes
a timeout is 100 ms. The timeout period may be greater, depending on the
application’s RPI. For example, if your application uses the default RPI = 20 ms,
the timeout period is 160 ms.

For more information on how to determine the time for your application, see
Rockwell Automation Knowledgebase Tech Note 38535. The document is
available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase/.

When a timeout does occur, the controller produces these warnings:

• An I/O fault status code is indicated on the status display of the

CompactLogix 5370 controller.

• The I/O status indicator on the front of the CompactLogix 5370

controller flashes green.

• A ! shows over the I/O configuration folder and over the devices that
have timed out.

• A module fault code is produced, which you can access via the following:
– The Module Properties dialog box
– A GSV instruction

For more information about I/O faults, see the Major, Minor, and I/O Faults
Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM014.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 281

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Determine if I/O Communication has Timed Out

This example could be used with the CompactLogix 5370 controllers:

• The GSV instruction gets the status of the I/O status indicator (via the
LEDStatus attribute of the Module object) and stores it in the
IO_LED tag.
• IO_LED is a DINT tag that stores the status of the I/O status indicator or
status display on the front of the controller.
• If IO_LED equals 2, than at least one I/O connection has been lost and
the Fault_Alert is set.

Figure 52 - GSV Used to Identify I/O Timeout

For more information about attributes available with the Module object, see the
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM003.

Determine if I/O Communication to a Specific I/O Module has

Timed Out

If communication times out with a device (module) in the I/O configuration of

the controller, the controller produces a fault code and fault information for the
module. You can use GSV instructions to get fault code and information via the
FaultCode and FaultInfo attributes of the Module object.

For more information about attributes available with the Module object, see the
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication
1756-RM003.

282 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Interrupt the Execution of Logic and Execute the Fault Handler

Depending on your application, you might want an I/O connection error to

cause the Controller Fault Handler to execute. To do so, set the module property
that causes a major fault to result from an I/O connection error. The major fault
then causes the execution of the Controller Fault Handler.

First, develop a routine in the Controller Fault Handler that can respond to I/O
connection faults. Then, in the Module Properties dialog box of the I/O module
or parent communication module, check Major Fault On Controller If
Connection Fails While in Run Mode.

Figure 53 - I/O Connection Fault Causes Major Fault

I/O Module Properties

Parent Communication Module Properties

For more information about programming the Controller Fault Handler, see the
Major, Minor, and I/O Faults Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM014.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 283

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

System Overhead Time Slice The controller communicates with other devices at either a specified rate
(scheduled) or when there is processing time available to service the
communication.

The system overhead time slice specifies the percentage of time a controller
devotes to service communication. If you have a continuous task, the System
Overhead Time Slice entered in the Advanced tab of the Controller Properties
dialog box specifies continuous task/service communication ratio. However, if
there is no continuous task, the overhead time slice has no affect.

The table shows the ratio between the continuous task and service
communication at various system overhead time slices.

Table 40 - Ratio between Continuous Task and Service Communication

At this time slice The continuous task runs Service communication occurs for up to
10% 9 ms 1 ms
20% 4 ms 1 ms
25% 3 ms 1 ms
33% 2 ms 1 ms
50% 1 ms 1 ms
66% 1 ms 2 ms
75% 1 ms 3 ms
80% 1 ms 4 ms
90% 1 ms 9 ms

As shown in Table 40, if the system overhead time slice is less than or equal to
50%, the duration stays fixed at 1 ms. The same applies for 66% and higher,
except there are multiple 1 ms intervals. For example, at 66% there are two 1 ms
intervals of consecutive time and at 90% there are nine 1 ms intervals of
consecutive time.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Configure the System Overhead Time Slice

To configure the system overhead time slice, perform this procedure.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click the controller and

choose Properties.

The Controller Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. Enter a numeric value in the System Overhead Time Slice box.
4. Use either Run Continuous Task (default) or Reserve for System Tasks.
– Click Run Continue Task when there is no communication or
background tasks to process; controller immediately returns to the
continuous task.
– Click Reserve for System Task to allocates the entire 1 ms of the system
overhead time slice whether the controller has communication or
background tasks to perform before returning back to the continuous
task. This lets you simulate a communication load on the controller
during design and programming before HMIs, controller to controller
messaging, and so forth, are set up.
5. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 285

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Sample Controller Projects

The application includes sample projects that you can copy and modify to fit
your application. To access the sample projects, complete these steps.

1. From the File menu, choose Open.

2. Browse to the sample projects list and select a sample project.

3. Click Open.

286 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Applications Chapter 10

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning products from
Rockwell Automation.

Resource Description
Logix5000 Controllers and I/O Tag Data Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM004 Explains procedures for using and organizing I/O data tags.
Logix5000 Controllers Common Procedures Programming Manual, publication Guides all user levels in developing projects for Logix5000 controllers and provides links to
1756-PM001 individual guides for information on topics such as import/export, messages, security,
and programming in different languages.
Add-On Instructions Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM010 Explains Add-On Instructions and how to use them.
Logix5000 Controllers General Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM003 Provides details about instructions for programming a Logix5000 controller.
Major, Minor, and I/O Faults Programming Manual, publication 1756-PM014 Explains major, minor, and I/O faults as well as the Controller Fault Handler.
Logix5000 Controllers Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication 1756-RM094 Provides advanced users with guidelines for system optimization and with system
information to guide system design choices.
Logix5000 Controllers Execution Time and Memory Use Reference Manual, publication Assists in estimating the memory use and execution time of programmed logic and in
1756-RM087 selecting among different programming options.

You can view or download publications at http://

www.rockwellautomation.com/literature. To order paper copies of technical
documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell
Automation sales representative.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 287

Chapter 10 Develop Applications

Notes:

288 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 11

Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP

Network Applications

Topic Page
Motion Axes Support 290
Maximum Number of Position Loop-configured Drives 291
Time Synchronization 292
Configure Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP Network 293
Scalability in Applications Using Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP Networks 297

Some of the CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over an

EtherNet/IP network, a motion solution on a standard, unmodified EtherNet/IP
network with simple design or configuration compared to traditional motion
applications.

IMPORTANT These CompactLogix 5370 controllers support Integrated Motion over an

EtherNet/IP network:
• 1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller
• 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller
• 1769-L30ERM controller
• 1769-L33ERM controller
• 1769-L36ERM controller

Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP applications use the following:

• Standard EtherNet/IP network
• High performance drives, including the following:
– Kinetix 350 drives
– Kinetix 6500 drives
– PowerFlex 755 drives
• Standard infrastructure components
• Programming software

For a complete description of how to use a CompactLogix 5370 controller in an

application that uses Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see the
CIP Motion Configuration and Startup User Manual, publication
MOTION-UM003.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 289

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications

Motion Axes Support The 1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM,

1769-L33ERM, and 1769-L36ERM controllers support these axes:
• AXIS_VIRTUAL
• AXIS_CIP_DRIVE

AXIS_VIRTUAL Axis
The AXIS_VIRTUAL axis is an internal axis representation that is not
associated with any physical drives. That is, you can configure the axis but it does
not cause any physical motion in your system.

AXIS_CIP_DRIVE Axis

The AXIS_CIP_DRIVE axis is a motion axis used with physical drives to cause
physical motion in your system as determined by your application.

Configuration Types

When adding an axis to your project, you must associate the axis to a drive.
Among other configuration parameters, you must select a configuration type.
The axis configuration type is also considered the drive configuration type.

For example, an AXIS_CIP_DRIVE axis may use a Position Loop configuration

and be associated with a Kinetix 350 drive. The axis is considered a Position
Loop-configured axis and the associated drive is considered a Position Loop-
configured drive.

The following drives support these configuration types:

• Kinetix 350 and Kinetix 6500 drives
– Position loop
– Velocity loop
– Torque loop

• PowerFlex 755 drive

– Position loop
– Velocity loop
– Torque loop
– Frequency control

290 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications Chapter 11

Maximum Number of The CompactLogix 5370 controllers support a maximum number of

EtherNet/IP nodes in a project. Any device added to the local Ethernet node in
Position Loop-configured the I/O configuration is counted toward the controller’s node limitation. For
Drives more information, see Nodes on an EtherNet/IP Network on page 118.

Drives are counted among the number of nodes in the I/O Configuration section
of an RSLogix 5000 project. If you use the maximum number of drives that a
1769-L18ERM-BB1B, 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B, 1769-L30ERM,
1769-L33ERM, or 1769-L36ERM controller supports in a single system, you
cannot add other EtherNet/IP devices to that project.

Position Loop-configured Drive Limits

Among the maximum number drives supported by the controllers, there is a
maximum number of Position Loop-configured drives supported in the
controller’s project.

For example, the 1769-L30ERM controller supports a maximum of four Position

Loop-configured drives.

Table 41 lists motion-related specification information for the controllers that

support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.
Table 41 - CompactLogix 5370 Controllers Supporting Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP
Network
Controller Type Drive Types Supported Number of Drives Number of Position
Supported, max Loop-configured Drives
Supported, max
1769-L18ERM-BB1B 8 2
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 16 4
Kinetix 350
1769-L30ERM Kinetix 6500 16 4
PowerFlex 755
1769-L33ERM 32 8
1769-L36ERM 48 16

If your solution requires more than 16 Position Loop-configured drives, consider

using the ControlLogix platform. The ControlLogix platform allows up to 100
Position Loop-configured drives.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 291

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications

Time Synchronization Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network requires Time Synchronization,
also known as CIP Sync. CIP Sync provides accurate real-time (real-world time)
or Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) synchronization of CompactLogix 5370
controllers and devices connected over an EtherNet/IP network.

CIP Sync is a time-synchronization protocol that can be applied to various

applications. This chapter focuses on using the protocol in applications with
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.

In a CompactLogix system, the following devices are CIP Sync-capable:

• All CompactLogix 5370 controllers - Required

IMPORTANT While all CompactLogix 5370 controllers are CIP Sync-capable, not all
of the controllers support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP
network.
A controller must be CIP Sync-capable and synchronized with other
devices on the EtherNet/IP network to support Integrated Motion over
an EtherNet/IP network. However, the condition of being CIP
Sync-capable does not exclusively qualify a CompactLogix 5370
controller to support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.
Table 41 on page 291 lists the CompactLogix 5370 controllers that
support Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network.

All controllers and communication modules must have time synchronization

enabled to participate in CIP Sync.

CIP Sync requires that devices in the system function in the following roles:

• Grandmaster, also known as the coordinated system time (CST) master -

Sets time for entire system and passes the time to a Master

• Master - Sets time for its backplane

• Slave - Uses time set by Master

292 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications Chapter 11

Configure Integrated Motion To use Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network, complete these steps.
on the EtherNet/IP Network
IMPORTANT These steps show a 1769-L36ERM controller. The same steps apply to other
CompactLogix 5370 controllers that support Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network with slight variations in screens.

1. Enable Time Synchronization.

2. Add a Drive.

IMPORTANT This section assumes you have previously created a project for your
1769-L36ERM controller. If you have not, do so before continuing.

Enable Time Synchronization

Configuring Integrated Motion on the EtherNet/IP network begins with
enabling time synchronization in a CompactLogix 5370 controller.

To enable Time Synchronization on a CompactLogix 5370 controller, complete

these steps.

1. In the Controller Organizer, right-click your controller and

choose Properties.

The Controller Properties dialog box appears.

2. Click the Date/Time tab.
3. Click Enable Time Synchronization.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 293

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications

4. Click OK.

Add a Drive

You can use these drives only in an application that uses Integrated Motion over
an EtherNet/IP network:
• Kinetix 350 drive
• Kinetix 6500 drive
• PowerFlex 755 AC drive

IMPORTANT These steps show a Kinetix 350 drive in a 1769-L36ERM control system. The
same steps apply to other CompactLogix 5370 controllers that support
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network with slight variations in
screens.

1. In the I/O configuration tree, right-click the Ethernet network and choose
New Module.

The Select Module Type dialog box appears.

294 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications Chapter 11

2. Select the desired drive and click Create.

The New Module dialog box appears.

3. Type a name for the module.
4. Type a description, if desired.
5. Assign an EtherNet/IP address.

For information on setting the IP addresses, see the publications for each
drive type listed on page 12.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 295

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications

6. If you need to change the configuration for any of the following

parameters, click Change in the Module Definition area:
• Revision
• Electronic Keying
• Connection
• Power Structure
• Verify Power Rating on Connection

The Module dialog box appears.

7. Make the desired changes and click OK.

8. Click OK to create the drive in your project.
9. Add other components required by your project.

296 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications Chapter 11

Scalability in Applications CompactLogix 5370 controllers offer varying levels of flexibility and scalability
to operate in control systems using Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP networks.
Using Integrated Motion on
EtherNet/IP Networks
1769-L30ERM, 1769-L33ERM, and 1769-L36ERM Controllers

You can use the following controllers in control systems requiring simpler
configuration and complex configuration of Integrated Motion on EtherNet/IP
networks parameters:
• 1769-L30ERM
• 1769-L33ERM
• 1769-L36ERM

Control Systems Requiring Simple Configuration

Relatively simple control systems that use Integrated Motion over an

EtherNet/IP network often include unmanaged switches, such as a Stratix 2000™
switch, and Kinetix 350 drives, as shown in this example.

Computer 1769-L33ERM Controller

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

Stratix 2000 Switch

1
P
W
R

PowerFlex 755 Drive

PanelView Plus 4

Terminal

Kinetix 350 Drive

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 297

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications

Control Systems Requiring Complex Configuration

Complex control systems that use Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP

network often include managed switches, such as a Stratix 6000 switch, and
Kinetix 6500 and PowerFlex 755 drives, as shown in this example.

Computer 1769-L33ERM Controller

00:00:BC:2E:69:F6
1 (Front)
2 (Rear)

PanelView Plus Stratix 6000 Switch

Terminal 8 7
6 5

4 3
2 1

Kinetix 350 Drive

Kinetix 6500
Drives
POINT I/O
Modules PowerFlex 755 Drive

298 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications Chapter 11

1769-L18ERM-BB1B Controller

The 1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller is typically used in control systems

requiring simpler configuration with respect to using Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network.

The simpler control system often includes unmanaged switches, such a

Stratix 2000 switch, and Kinetix 350 drives, as shown in this example.

IP Address:
ENET Address: 00:00:BC:66:0F:C7

Computer 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
Controller

Stratix 2000 Switch

P
W
R

PowerFlex 755 Drive

PanelView Plus with Motor
Terminal

Kinetix 350 Drive

with Motor

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 299

Chapter 11 Develop Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP Network Applications

1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B Controller

The 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller is typically used in control systems

requiring simpler configuration with respect to using Integrated Motion over an
EtherNet/IP network.

The simpler control system often includes unmanaged switches, such a Stratix
2000 switch, and Kinetix 350 drives, as shown in this example.

L27ERM 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A0 B0 Z0

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SOURCE

IN
24VDC
QBFC1B

SINK\

INPUT
DC

HIGH SPEED
A1 B1 Z1

COUNTER
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE

OUT
OUTPUT
SOURCE
24VDC

DC
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 2 FUSE
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 3 OK

DC IN HSC

00 08 A0+ A0-

01 09 B0+ B0-

02 10 Z0+ Z0-

03 11 A1+ A1-

Computer 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B
04 12 B1+ B1-

05 13 Z1+ Z1-

06 14 +V +V
OUT OUT
07 15 0 2
COM COM OUT 0UT
1 3

Controller
0 1
NC NC COM COM
V V
+V +V in in
0+ 2+
I I
00 08 in in
0+ 2+
V/I V/I
01 09 in in
0- 2-
CJC inV
02 10 + 3+
CJC inI
03 11 - 3+
V V/I
04 12 in in
1+ 3-
00:00:BC:2E:69:F6 05 13
I V/I
in in
1+ 1-
V V
06 14 OUT OUT
0+ 1+
I I
07 15 OUT in
0+ 1+
COM COM COM COM
0 1
DC OUT ANALOG

Stratix 2000 Switch +24VDC

+24VDC COM
COM FG
FG

PowerFlex 755 Drive

PanelView Plus with Motor
Terminal

Kinetix 350 Drive

with Motor

For more information on Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP network, see

the publications listed on page 12.

300 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Chapter 12

Use a Secure Digital Card

This chapter describes the primary tasks required to store a project on an SD card
or load a project from an SD card to the CompactLogix 5370 controller.

Topic Page
Store or Load a Project with the Secure Digital Card 303
Store a Project 304
Load a Project 307

IMPORTANT The life expectancy of flash media is strongly dependent on the number of
write cycles that are performed. Flash media uses wear leveling but users
should avoid frequent writes.
Avoiding frequent writes is particularly important when logging data. We
recommend that you log data to a buffer in your controller’s memory and limit
the number of times data is written to removable media.

CompactLogix 5370 controllers support nonvolatile storage through the

following SD cards:

• 1784-SD1 - Ships with CompactLogix 5370 controller and offers 1 GB of

memory. You can order additional 1784-SD1 cards if desired.

• 1784-SD2 cards - Available for separate purchase and offer 2 GB of

memory.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 301

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

For information on how to install or remove an SD card from a

CompactLogix 5370 controller, see Install the Secure Digital Card on page 61.

IMPORTANT We recommend that you leave the SD card installed in the controller and the
card unlocked. The SD card saves extended diagnostic information you can
send to Rockwell Automation that provides enhanced diagnostics of your
application and firmware revision should circumstances require this data.
This section briefly describes how to use the SD card when installed in a
CompactLogix 5370 controller, that is, how to store a project from the
controller to the SD card and how to load a project from the SD card to the
controller.
However, you may need to complete other tasks using the SD card, such as
the following:
• Change the image that is loaded from the card
• Check for a load that was completed
• Clear an image from the memory card
• Store an empty image
• Change load parameters
• Read/write application data to the card
For more detailed information about using an SD card, see the Logix5000
Controllers Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM017.

302 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use a Secure Digital Card Chapter 12

Store or Load a Project with There are several options for when to load the project back into the
CompactLogix 5370 controller’s user memory (RAM). The option used is
the Secure Digital Card determined by the controller configuration.

The following table describes the conditions in which a project is loaded from as
described in the following table.
Condition to Load Required Setting in Notes
Project From an SD Controller
Card into Controller Configuration
RAM
Controller power-up On Power Up • During a power cycle, you lose any online changes and tag
values you have not stored on the memory card.
• A load from a memory card may also change the firmware of
the controller.
• For more information, see the Logix5000 Controllers
Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM017.
• You can always use the application to load the project.
No project in the On Corrupt Memory • During a power cycle, you lose any online changes and tag
controller and you values you have not stored on the memory card.
power-up the • A load from a memory card may also change the firmware of
controller the controller.
• For more information, see the Logix5000 Controllers
Nonvolatile Memory Card Programming Manual, publication
1756-PM017.
• You can always use the application to load the project.
Only through User Initiated You lose any online changes and tag values you have not stored on
application the memory card.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 303

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

Store a Project Follow these steps to store a project. These steps show a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B
controller. The same steps apply for other CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

1. Go online with the controller.

2. Put the controller in Program mode, that is, Remote Program or Program.
3. On the Online tool bar, click the controller properties icon.

4. Click the Nonvolatile Memory tab.

5. Click Load/Store.

TIP If Load/Store is dimmed (unavailable), verify the following:

• You have specified the correct communication path and are online with the
controller.
• The memory card is installed.
If the memory card is not installed, the missing card is indicated by a message
in the lower-left corner of the Nonvolatile Memory tab as shown here.

304 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use a Secure Digital Card Chapter 12

6. Choose under what conditions to load the project into the user memory of
the controller.
Project that is currently on the memory card of Project that is currently in the user memory of
the controller (if any project is there). the controller.

If you choose On Power Up or On Corrupt Memory, you must also choose

the mode you want the controller to go to after the load:
• Remote Program
• Remote Run
7. In the Automatic Firmware Update box, use the default (disable) or choose
the appropriate firmware supervisor option.

IMPORTANT The Firmware Supervisor option is not used to upgrade the

controller firmware.

8. Click <- Store.

IMPORTANT Store is not active if a SD card is locked.

A dialog box asks you to confirm the store.

9. To store the project, click Yes.
10. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 305

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

After you click Store, the project is saved to the SD card as indicated by the
controller status indicators. These conditions may exist:

• While the store is in progress, the following occurs:

– The OK indicator is flashing green.

– The SD indicator is flashing green.
– A dialog box indicates the store is in progress.

• When the store is complete, the following occurs:

– The controller resets itself.

When the controller is resetting itself, the status indicators execute a
sequence of state changes, for example, a brief period of time with the
OK status indicator in the solid red state. Wait for the controller to
complete the sequence.

– After the controller fully resets itself, the OK indicator is solid green.

– The SD indicator is off.

IMPORTANT Allow the store to complete without interruption. If you interrupt the
store, data corruption or loss may occur.

306 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Use a Secure Digital Card Chapter 12

Load a Project Follow these steps to use the application to load the project from an SD card.
These steps show a 1769-L18ERM-BB1B controller. The same steps apply for
other CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

1. Go online with the controller.

2. Put the controller in Program mode, that is, Remote Program or Program.
3. On the Online tool bar, click the controller properties icon.

4. Click the Nonvolatile Memory tab.

5. Click Load/Store.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 307

Chapter 12 Use a Secure Digital Card

6. Click Load.
Project that is currently on the memory card of the Project that is currently in the user memory of
controller (if any project is there). the controller.

A dialog box prompts you to confirm the load.

7. To load the project, click Yes.
8. Click OK.

After you click Load, the project is loaded into the controller as indicated by the
controller status indicators. These conditions may exist:

• While the load is in progress, the following occurs:

– The controller resets itself.

When the controller is resetting itself, the status indicators execute a
sequence of state changes, for example, a brief period of time with the
OK status indicator in the solid red state. Wait for the controller to
complete the sequence.

– After the controller fully resets itself, the OK indicator is solid green.

– The SD indicator is off.

308 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Appendix A

Status Indicators

This section explains how to interpret the status indicators on your

CompactLogix 5370 controllers. All controllers use the status indicators
described in the following table.
Status Indicator Description
RUN Indicates the controller’s operating mode.
FORCE Indicates the force state.
I/O Indicates the current state of communication between the controller and I/O modules.
OK Indicates the controller’s state.
NS Indicates the EtherNet/IP network status with regard to the controller operating on the
network.
LINK 1 Indicates the controller’s EtherNet/IP link status for port 1.
LINK 2 Indicates the controller’s EtherNet/IP link status for port 2.
SD Indicates if there is currently activity on the SD card.

Use the CompactLogix 5370 The following graphic shows the controller status indicators for all of the
CompactLogix 5370 controllers.
Controllers Status Indicators

Table 42 - Controller Mode (RUN) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off The controller is in Program or Test mode.
Green The controller is in Run mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 309

Appendix A Status Indicators

Table 43 - Force State (FORCE) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off No tags contain I/O force values. I/O forces are inactive (disabled).
Yellow I/O forces are active (enabled). I/O force values may or may not exist.
Flashing yellow One or more input or output addresses have been forced to an On or Off condition, but
the forces have not been enabled.

Table 44 - I/O State (I/O) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off One of the following conditions exists:
• There are no devices in the I/O configuration of the controller. - Only applies to
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers.
• The controller does not contain a project.
Green The controller is communicating with all of the devices in its I/O configuration.
Flashing green One or more devices in the I/O configuration of the controller are not responding.
Flashing red One of the following conditions exists:
• The controller is not communicating with any devices.
• A fault has occurred on the controller. - CompactLogix 5370 L1 and L2
controllers only.

Table 45 - Controller Status (OK) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off No power is applied.
Green The controller is OK.
Flashing green The controller is storing a project to or loading a project from the SD card.
Red The controller detected a nonrecoverable major fault and cleared the project
from memory.
Flashing red One of the following:
• The controller requires a firmware update.
• A major recoverable fault occurred on the controller.
• A nonrecoverable major fault occurred on the controller and cleared the program
from memory.
• A controller firmware update is in process.
• An embedded I/O module firmware update is in process. - CompactLogix 5370 L1
controllers only.
Dim green to red Save to Flash at power-down.

310 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Status Indicators Appendix A

Table 46 - Ethernet Network Status (NS) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off The port is not initialized; it does not have an IP address and is operating in BOOTP or
DHCP mode.
Green The port has an IP address and CIP connections are established.
Flashing green The port has an IP address, but no CIP connections are established.
Red The port has detected that the assigned IP address is already in use.
Flashing red/green The port is performing its power-up self test.

Table 47 - Ethernet Link Status (LINK 1/LINK 2) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off One of the following conditions exists:
• No link.
• Port administratively disabled.
• Port disabled because rapid ring fault condition was detected (LINK2).
Green One of the following conditions exists:
• A 100 Mbps link (half- or full-duplex) exists, no activity.
• A 10 Mbps link (half- or full-duplex) exists, no activity.
• Ring network is operating normally and the controller is the active supervisor.
• Ring network has encountered a rare partial network fault and the controller is the
active supervisor.
Flashing green One of the following conditions exists:
• A 100 Mbps link exists and there is activity.
• A 10 Mbps link exists and there is activity.

Table 48 - SD Card Activity (SD) Status Indicator

Status Description
Off There is no activity to the SD card.
Flashing green The controller is reading from or writing to the SD card.
Flashing red The SD card does not have a valid file system.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 311

Appendix A Status Indicators

Notes:

312 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Appendix B

Connections over an EtherNet/IP Network

IMPORTANT Before using this section, first use the information at Nodes on an EtherNet/IP
Network on page 118 when designing and configuring your CompactLogix
5370 control system.

For more information on how to best design EtherNet/IP network use in your
CompactLogix 5370 control system, see these resources:
• The EtherNet/IP Capacity Tool available at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/solutions/integratedarchitecture/
resources3.html#enetpredict.

The EtherNet/IP Capacity Tool helps you in the initial layout of your
EtherNet/IP network.

• Ethernet Design Considerations Reference Manual, publication

ENET-RM002

CompactLogix 5370 controllers use connections to manage communication on

the EtherNet/IP network. A connection is a point-to-point communication
mechanism used to transfer data between a transmitter and a receiver.
Connections can be logical or physical.

You indirectly determine the number of connections the controller uses by

configuring the controller to communicate with other devices in the system.
Connections are allocations of resources that provide more reliable
communication between devices than unconnected messages.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 313

Appendix B Connections over an EtherNet/IP Network

All EtherNet/IP connections are unscheduled. An unscheduled connection is a

message transfer between controllers that is triggered by the requested packet
interval (RPI) or the program, such as a MSG instruction. Unscheduled
messaging lets you send and receive data when needed.

This table list specific information for CompactLogix 5370 controllers.

Table 49 - CompactLogix 5370 Controller EtherNet/IP Network Port Specifications
Cat. No. Connections CIP Unconnected Packet Rate Capacity SNMP Media Produced/Consumed Tags
Messages (packets/second)(1) Support Support
(backplane + (password
Controller TCP CIP Ethernet) I/O HMI/MSG required) Number of Unicast
Multicast Available
Tags, max(2)
1769-L16ER-BB1B
1769-L18ER-BB1B
1769-L18ERM-BB1B
1769-L24ER-QB1B
1769-L24ER-QBFC1B
400 32 multicast
1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B 6000 @ 500 messages/s produced tags
256 120 256 256 bytes/ @ 20% Yes Twisted Pair Yes
1769-L30ER packet comm. 128 unicast
timeslice produced tags
1769-L30ERM
1769-L30ER-NSE
1769-L33ER
1769-L33ERM
1769-L36ERM
(1) Total packet rate capacity = I/O Produced Tag, max + HMI/MSG, max. Packet rates will vary depending on packet size. For more detailed specifications, see the capacity section of the EDS file for the
specific catalog number.

(2) These are the maximum numbers of CIP I/O connections.

314 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Appendix C

History of Changes

Changes to the Manual With the availability of new controllers, modules, applications, and
programming software features, this manual has been revised to include updated
information. This appendix briefly summarizes changes that have been made with
previous revisions of this manual.

IMPORTANT This appendix does not list the changes that have been implemented with this
revision of the publication.
For a list of changes made in this revision of the publication, see Summary of
Changes on page 3.

Reference this appendix if you need information to determine what changes have
been made across multiple revisions. This may be especially useful if you are
deciding to upgrade your hardware or software based on information added with
previous revisions of this manual.

This table lists the publication revision, publication date, and changes made with
the revision.
Table 50 - History of Changes
Publication Revision and Date Topic
1769-UM021C-EN-P, May 2012 Added the description of CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers, including the
following content:
• Installing the controller
• Control system components
• Controller functionality
• Example system configurations on an EtherNet/IP network
• Example system configurations on a DeviceNet network
• Using I/O modules with the controller 169
• Motion support with the 1769-L27ERM-QBFC1B controller
• EtherNet/IP network connection specifications
1769-UM021B-EN-P, February 2012 Removed the descriptions of the I/O Event Task and its use with the
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers.

In RSLogix 5000 software, version 20.xx.xx, you can configure the I/O Event
Task for your CompactLogix 5370 L1 controller’s project. However, the task
will never be triggered because the functionality has been disabled in the
controller.

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 315

Appendix C History of Changes

Notes:

316 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Index

Numerics CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers

1734 POINT I/O modules 139-178 connecting power 26-30
connections to I/O modules 166
BUS OFF detection and recovery 178 DIN rail use 22
configure 165-175 direct connections 166
monitor faults 176 embedded I/O module 16
removal and insertion under power 18 wiring diagrams 147
requested packet interval 158 embedded power supply 16, 27
select 139 EtherNet/IP network
using as local expansion modules with Quality of Service technology 130
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 16 socket interface 126-130
validate layout 156-160 topologies 120-124
1769 Compact I/O modules 237-266 EtherNet/IP network controller connections
calculate system power consumption 244- 313-314
246 example EtherNet/IP network system
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 58 configuration 111
configure 219-222, 252-264 external power supply 16, 27
connections 222, 253 grounding 22, 24
end cap detection 236, 266 I/O modules 139-178
local banks available with CompactLogix 5370 installation 13-32
L3 controllers 58 grounding 24
monitor faults 234, 265 minimum spacing 23
requested packet interval 213, 221, 242, 253 mounting 22-23
select 179, 237 SD card 20-21
using as local expansion modules with system dimensions 23
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 36 integrated motion over an EtherNet/IP
validate layout 242-249 network 289-300
1769 Compact I/O power supplies local expansion modules 16
calculate system power consumption 244- BUS OFF detection and recovery 178
246 removal and insertion under power 18
1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner module 133 minimum spacing 23
1784-SD1 and 1784-SD2 cards 19, 38 mounting 22-23
networks
installation EtherNet/IP network connection 32
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 20-21 USB connection 31
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 39-40
parts 19
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 61-62
place I/O modules 160
rack-optimized connections 166
A select I/O modules 139
selecting operating mode 103-104
additional resources 12 status indicators 309-311
Add-On Instructions system components 16, 108
in project 279 system dimensions 23
application wiring diagrams 147
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers
elements 267
AutoFlash 93 connecting power 48-51
connections to I/O modules 222
load firmware 100-102 DeviceNet network
using 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner
B module 133
DIN rail use 41, 45
BOOTP server 75 direct connections 222
set IP address 78-81 embedded I/O module 36
embedded power supply 36, 48
EtherNet/IP network
C Quality of Service technology 130
socket interface 126-130
communicate
over networks 115-133

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 317

Index

topologies 120-124 removal and insertion under power 63

EtherNet/IP network controller connections minimum spacing 67
313-314 mounting 66-69, 70
example DeviceNet network system networks
configuration 113, 132 DeviceNet 131-133
example EtherNet/IP network system EtherNet/IP network connection 73
configuration 112 USB connection 72
external power supply 36, 48 parts 60
grounding 41, 45 power supply
installation 33-53 current capacity 138
grounding 45 distance rating 58, 69, 134-137
minimum spacing 42 rack-optimized connections 253
mounting 41-42, 44 select I/O modules 237
SD card 39-40 selecting operating mode 103-104
system dimensions 42 status indicators 309-311
integrated motion over an EtherNet/IP system components 58, 108
network 289-300 system dimensions 68
local expansion modules 36 configure
minimum spacing 42 I/O modules
mounting 41-42, 44 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L1
networks controllers 165-175
DeviceNet 131-133 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L2
EtherNet/IP network connection 53 controllers 219-222
USB connection 52 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L3
parts 38 controllers 252-264
power supply system overhead time slice 285
distance rating 134-137 connections
rack-optimized connections 222 direct
select I/O modules 179 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 166
selecting operating mode 103-104 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 222
status indicators 309-311 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 253
system components 36, 108 EtherNet/IP network controller connections
system dimensions 42 313-314
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers rack-optimized
available local I/O banks 58 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 166
calculate system power consumption 244- CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 222
246 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 253
connecting power 65 to I/O modules
connections to I/O modules 253 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 166
DeviceNet network CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 222
using 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 253
module 133 continuous task 270
DIN rail use 71 ControlFLASH utility 75, 93
direct connections 253
EtherNet/IP network load firmware 95-98
Quality of Service technology 130 controller
socket interface 126-130 monitor
topologies 120-124 connections 281
EtherNet/IP network controller connections program 272
313-314 routine 274
example DeviceNet network system tags 275
configuration 113, 132 tasks 268
example EtherNet/IP network system current capacity
configuration 112 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 138
grounding 69
I/O modules 237-266
installation 55-74 D
grounding 69 develop
minimum spacing 67
mounting 70 applications 267
SD card 61-62 device-level ring topology 74
system dimensions 68 DeviceNet network
integrated motion over an EtherNet/IP 1769-SDN DeviceNet scanner module 133
network 289-300 DHCP server 75
local 1769 Compact I/O modules 58 set IP address 82

318 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Index

DIN rail external power supply

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 27
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 41, 45 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 48
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 71
direct connections
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 166 F
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 222 fault code
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 253 use GSV to get 282
distance rating faults
power supply monitor I/O module faults
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 58, 69 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 176
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 234
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 265
E firmware
elements CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers’ embedded
control application 267 I/O module 99
embedded I/O module download 93-94
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 16 load 93-102
upgrade firmware 99 via AutoFlash 100-102
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 36 via ControlFLASH utility 95-98
wiring diagrams 147 via SD card 102
embedded power supply
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 27
calculate system power consumption G
160, 215 grounding
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 48 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22, 24
enclosures CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 41, 45
minimum spacing CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 69
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 23 GSV
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42 fault code 282
system dimensions monitor
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 23 connection 282
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42
EtherNet/IP network
available network topologies 32, 53, 74 I
change IP address 89-92 I/O modules
via Logix Designer application 91-92
via RSLinx Classic software 90 calculate system power consumption
via SD card 92 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 160
communication 115-125 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 215
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L1 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 244-
controllers 32 246
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L2 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 139-178
controllers 53 BUS OFF detection and recovery 178
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L3 local expansion modules 152
controllers 73 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 179-236
controller connections 313-314 local expansion modules 210
example configurations 111-112 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 237-266
Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP local 1769 Compact I/O modules 58
network 110, 289-300 configure
overview 115-125 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L1
Quality of Service technology 130 controllers 165-175
set IP address 77-88 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L2
via BOOTP server 78-81 controllers 219-222
via DHCP server 82 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L3
via Logix Designer application 85-87 controllers 252-264
via RSLinx Classic software 83-84 connections
via SD card 88 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 166
socket interface 126-130 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 222
topologies 120-125 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 253
device-level ring 120 embedded I/O module on CompactLogix 5370
linear 120, 123 L1 controllers 16
star 124 embedded I/O module on CompactLogix 5370
event task 161-164, 270 L2 controllers 36
end cap detection

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 319

Index

CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 236 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 68

CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 266 Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP
monitor faults network 110, 289-300
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 176 configure 293-296
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 234 drive limits 291
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 265 example configuration
place CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 299
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 160 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 300
requested packet interval 221, 253 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 297
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 158, supported axes 290
166 time synchronization 292
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 213 IP address 75
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 242
select change 89-92
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 139 via Logix Designer application 91-92
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 179 via RSLinx Classic software 90
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 237 via SD card 92
validate layout set 77-88
1734 POINT I/O modules 156-160 via BOOTP server 78-81
1769 Compact I/O modules 213-218, via DHCP server 82
242-249 via Logix Designer application 85-87
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 156- via RSLinx Classic software 83-84
160 via SD card 88
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 213-
218
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 242- L
249 linear network topology 74
installation local 1769 Compact I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 13-32 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 58
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 33-53 local expansion modules
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 55-74 1734 POINT I/O modules 16
DIN rail 1769 Compact I/O modules 36
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 16
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 41, 45 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 36
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 71 local I/O banks
grounding
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 24 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 58
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 45 Logix Designer application
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 69 AutoFlash 93
local 1769 Compact I/O modules change IP address 91-92
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 238 configure I/O modules
minimum spacing for use with CompactLogix 5370 L1
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 23 controllers 165-175
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42 for use with CompactLogix 5370 L2
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 67 controllers 219-222
mounting for use with CompactLogix 5370 L3
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22-23 controllers 252-264
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 41-42, Integrated Motion over an EtherNet/IP
44 network 289-300
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 66-69, load a project to an SD card 307-308
70 set IP address 85-87
panel mounting store a project to an SD card 304-306
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44 using event task 161-164
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 70
power supply connections to CompactLogix
5370 L1 controllers 26-30 M
power supply connections to CompactLogix memory storage
5370 L2 controllers 48-51 SD cards 19, 38
required software tasks 75-104 minimum spacing
SD card
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 20-21 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 23
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 39-40 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 61-62 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 67
system dimensions
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 23
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42

320 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

 Index

mounting power supply

CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 22-23 connections to CompactLogix 5370 L1
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 41-42, 44 controllers 26-30
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 66-69, 70 connections to CompactLogix 5370 L2
controllers 48-51
connections to CompactLogix 5370 L3
N controllers 65
networks current capacity
CompactLogix 5370 L3 control systems
DeviceNet 131-133 138
example CompactLogix 5370 L2 distance rating 134-137
controller system configuration 113, CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 69
132 embedded power supply with CompactLogix
example CompactLogix 5370 L3 5370 L1 controllers 16, 27
controller system configuration 113 embedded power supply with CompactLogix
EtherNet/IP 5370 L2 controllers 36, 48
change IP address via Logix Designer external power supply with CompactLogix
application 91-92 5370 L1 controllers 16, 27
change IP address via RSLinx Classic external power supply with CompactLogix
software 90 5370 L2 controllers 36, 48
change IP address via SD card 92 priority
example configurations 111-112
network connection for CompactLogix task 271
5370 L1 controllers 32 program
network connection for CompactLogix in project 272
5370 L2 controllers 53 scheduled 273
network connection for CompactLogix system overhead time slice 284
5370 L3 controllers 73 unscheduled 273
network controller connections 313-314 programming languages 278
Quality of Service technology 130 project
set IP address via BOOTP server 78-81 elements 267
set IP address via DHCP server 82
set IP address via Logix Designer
application 85-87 Q
set IP address via RSLinx Classic software
83-84 Quality of Service technology 130
set IP address via SD card 88
socket interface 126-130
overviews 115-133 R
USB rack-optimized connections
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L1 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 166
controllers 31 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 222
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L2 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 253
controllers 52 removal and insertion under power
connection for CompactLogix 5370 L3
controllers 72 local 1769 Compact I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 63
local expansion modules
O CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 18
requested packet interval
operating mode CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 158, 166
selecting 103-104 CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 213, 221
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 242, 253
routine
P in project 274
panel mounting RSLinx Classic software 75, 131
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 44 change IP address 90
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 70 set IP address 83-84
periodic task 270 RSLogix 5000 software 75, 131
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software 75, 131

S
sample projects 286

Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012 321

Index

scheduled system overhead time slice 284

program 273 configure 285
SD card 93, 301-308 system power consumption
change IP address 92 calculate
installation CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 160,
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 20-21 215
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 39-40 CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 244-
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 61-62 246
load a project 307-308
load firmware 102
set IP address 88 T
store a project 304-306 tag
socket interface 126-130
in project 275
software task
BOOTP 75 continuous 270
set IP address 78-81 event 161-164, 270
DHCP 75 in project 268
set IP address 82 periodic 270
Logix Designer application priority 271
AutoFlash 93 time slice 284
required installation tasks 75-104
RSLinx Classic 75, 131
change IP address 90
set IP address 83-84 U
RSLogix 5000 75, 131 unscheduled
RSNetWorx for DeviceNet 75, 131 program 273
Studio 5000 environment 75, 131 USB cable
star network topology 74 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 31
status CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 52
monitor CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 72
connections 281
status indicators 309-311
Studio 5000 environment 75, 131 V
system assembly validate I/O modules layout
calculate system power consumption 1734 POINT I/O modules 156-160
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 160, 1769 Compact I/O modules 213-218, 242-
215 249
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 244-
246
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers W
select I/O modules 237 wiring diagrams
place I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 160 CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 147
select I/O modules
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 139
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 179
validate I/O modules layout
1734 POINT I/O modules 156-160
1769 Compact I/O modules 213-218
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 156-
160
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 213-
218
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 242-
249
system components
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 16, 108
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 36, 108
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 58, 108
system dimensions
CompactLogix 5370 L1 controllers 23
CompactLogix 5370 L2 controllers 42
CompactLogix 5370 L3 controllers 68

322 Rockwell Automation Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support, you can find technical manuals, technical and application notes, sample
code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these
tools. You can also visit our Knowledgebase at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/knowledgebase for FAQs, technical
information, support chat and forums, software updates, and to sign up for product notification updates.

For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnectSM support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation
representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/.

Installation Assistance

If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this
manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.

New Product Satisfaction Return

Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the
manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your
distributor to complete the return process.
Outside United States Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this
document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

Publication 1769-UM021D-EN-P - December 2012

Supersedes Publication 1769-UM021C-EN-P - May 2012 Copyright © 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.